AE-4020-Service Manual Akray 4020

AUTIONＴＭ ELEVEN
AE-4020
SERVICE MANUAL
Date of issue Jun. 2005
Drawing No. AE-4020-C-09B-015

INTRODUCTION
The AUTION™ ELEVEN AE-4020 analyzer is manufactured in a strict quality control, however, because it is a
precision instrument, if one part is deteriorated, satisfactory result may not be obtained. Moreover, because it is
an analyzer using high technology, any operational trouble also affects measurement result significantly. In case
a trouble is occurred due to such a reason, refer to this service manual and operating manual for an appropriate
remedy.
CAUTION
This service manual is made for specially trained service representative only. This may be used as a
reference material for other persons, however, KDK Corporation bears no liability for any accidents or no
warranty of the product if undesignated person performs the service described on this manual.
Contents
Introduction
1. Outline of the Analyzer

1. Outline of the Analyzer 1-2
2. Composition
1. Diagram of assembly 2-2
2. Drawings 2-3
3. Service Mode
1. Service Mode Specifications 3-1
4. Electrical Circuit Diagrams

1. Electrical Circuit Diagrams 4-1
5. Standard Inspection
1. Test Items 5-2
2. Test Methods and Standard 5-3
6. Adjustment Method
1. Adjusting Items and parts 6-1
Appendix
1. External Output Specifications
2. Printing Formats Specifications
3. Error & Trouble Specifications
4. Work Standard
5. Ethernet settings
6.Maintenance parts
AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

1) Characteristics・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・２
2) Specifications・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・２
3) Principles of Measurement・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・３
1-1
Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
1) Characteristics
Auto start,and non-directional test strip placement
Compact:210x328x164
Lightweight:3.6kg
Simple structure& Easy maintenance
Auto absorbing surplus sample urine
Color tone determination
Temperature correction
Abnormal color detection
No dipping detection
Test strip type auto-detection(assuming they have auto-classification marks)
2) Specifications
Name : Semi-automatic urine analyzer, the AUTION ELEVEN AE-4020
Apparatus make-up : Instrument , AC adapter (AC100V∼AC240V)
Sample : Urine
Test Strips : AUTION Sticks
AUTION Screen (micro albumin/creatinine)
Meas. Item : GLU, KET, BIL, NIT, PRO, URO, pH, BLD, LEU, Specific Gravity,
Color-tone, New items (ALB, CRE, A/C, P/C)
Meas. Method : Test strip; Single (BLD only ) or Dual Wavelength Reflectance Method
Meas. Wavelengths : 4-wavelength LED (450, 565, 635, 760 nm)
Dipping : The user dips test strips into samples.
Processing speed : 514 samples per hour (maximum processing mode: 7-second interval)
Test strip reaction time : 60 seconds
Warming up Time : 60 seconds
Caliblation : Calibrated automatically by a blank pad
Measurement types :Normal measurement, STAT measurement, Control measurement, Check
measurement
Display : Custom LC display (icons are used)
Operation part : (START,STOP,FEED,MENU,ENTER,0-9,−,←,→,ID)
Printer : Thermal printer (paper width: 58mm)
Data memory amount : 520 samples
Input Analytical curve : entering information on analytical curve through PC
Method of removing surplus urine
: Capilarity
Precision control : Measurement of The Aution Check (Control urine)
Auxiliary function : User mode (DATE, ID numbers, MEMORY , Printing of parameters, Test
strip type, Measurement result format, Printer settings, External output
ON/OFF)
Service mode (Test operation of system, Analytical curve setting, System
parameter setting, Initialize EEPROM)
Other function : Color tone determination, Temperature correction, Abnormal color
detection, No dipping detection )
Measurement environment : Temperature:10 to 30°C, Humidity: 30 to 60%R.H. (non-condensing)
*Temperature correction function used
Dimensions : 210 (width) x 328 (depth) x 164 (height) mm
Weight : Approx. 3.6 kg
Supply voltage : 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (worldwide support, using plug adapters)
Pharmaceutical Affairs law : Conformity
Applicable laws, : Domestic EMC and CE marking (IVD Directive) Conformity
regulations and (UL, FCC, FDA) Compliance
standards
3) Principles of measurement
1-2
Measurement is done by the Single or Dual Wavelength Reflectance Method.
Measurement of Test Strips

Dip a Test Strip into urine sample for 2 seconds. Set the Test Strip on the Test Strip Tray. The
Test Strip is carried by the Carrying Arm and excess urine is removed by the Excess Urine Suction
Pad. The handling function catches and carries the Test Strip to the Optical Block for
measurement. In 60 seconds, reflectance will be measured and the Test Strip is disposed into the
Waste Box.
In the Optical Block, two different ranges of wavelength from the LED are irradiated on the reacted
parts of the Test Strip and the color-tone-compensated section. At that time, the combination of the
wavelengths is different for each measurement item, as shown in the table below.
Light irradiated to the color-tone-compensation section is adjusted for interfering factors such as
amount of reflected light and color of sample.
From the amount of reflected light measured in the Optical Block, the reflectance is calculated
using the following formula:
R = Tm ･ Cs / Ts ･ Cm
R: Reflectance
Tm: Reflective light amount with the meas. wavelength
Ts: Reflective light amount with the ref. wavelength
Cm:Reflective light amount at the color-tone-compensated section with the meas. wavelength
Cs: Reflective light amount at the color-tone-compensated section with the ref. wavelength
However, the calculation of BLD is made for a single

Meas. Meas. Ref.
wavelength using the following formula:
item wavelength wavelength
R = Tm / Cm (nm) (nm)
GLU 635 760

Reflectance R obtained in the formula is referred to
the programmed calibration curve, and is output as the PRO 635 760
measurement result. BIL 565 760
URO 565 760
The measurement items and their reference wavelengths
are shown at right. PH 635 760
S.G. 635 760
Finally, in order to compensate for temperature, the
BLD 635 −
reflectance R is corrected using the following formula:
KET 565 760
2 2
Rt = R + A ( T - 27 ) ･ R ･ (1-R) NIT 565 760
LEU 565 760
Rt: Reflectance after correction
A: Correction coefficient ALB 565 760
T: Measurement temperature CRE 635 760
1-3
Measurement of Color-tone
● Combination of Tone and Hue

Total of 23 color-tone is analyzed simultaneously.
The right chart shows the combination of tone and hue. COLORLESS
The tone and hue of urine sample are obtained by YELLOW

different measuring reflectances; R(635nm), G(565nm), LIGHT ORANGE
B(430nm), and IR(760nm).
BROWN
The Hue is obtained by the right chart. (NORMAL × RED

) VIOLET
The Color-tone is calculated using the following formula.
BLUE
The result is defined in three ranges as LIGHT, NORMAL,
DARK GREEN
or DARK:
OTHER
● Color-tone
Y: Reflectance of 430nm
M: Reflectance of 565nm
C: Reflectance of 635nm
r: Reflectance of 760nm
1-4
Chapter 2 Composition
1. Diagram of assembly
1) Diagram of assembly············································································································· 2-2
2. Drawings
1) Main Unit································································································································ 2-3
2)Assembly of Maintenance cover ····························································································· 2-5
3)Assembly of Under cover ········································································································ 2-7
4)Assembly of Chassis··············································································································· 2-8
5) Assembly of Optical Unit ······································································································ 2-10
6) Assembly of Table-base······································································································ 2-11
7) Assembly of drive part for Introduction················································································· 2-12
8) Assembly of drive part for conveyance ················································································ 2-13
2-1
Chapter 2 Composition AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
1. Diagram of Assembly
22-03211
Chassis 22-02929
Assembly of reinforcement metallic base 23-02926
Assembly of table 23-02943
Assembly of lever for introduction 24-02944
Assembly of drive part for introduction 23-02930
Assembly of motor for introduction 24-02931
Assembly of DC-motor 24-02988
PI-Assembly of drive part for introduction 24-02916
Assembly of table base 23-02932
Assembly(L) of mechanism for alignment 24-02933
Assembly(R) of mechanism for alignment 24-02934
Assembly of lever for conveyance 24-02935
Assembly of micro-switch 24-02920
Assembly of drive part for conveyance 24-02987
Assembly of lever-frame 24-02936
Assembly of pulley(F) 24-02945
Assembly of pulley(R) 24-02946
Assembly of motor for conveyance 24-02937
Assembly of DC-motor 24-02921
PI-Assembly of drive part for conveyance 24-02917
Assembly of table(R) for conveyance 24-02938
Assembly(adhesion) of table(R) for conveyance 24-03022
Assembly of photo-sensor 24-02919
Assembly of table(C) for conveyance 24-02939
Assembly of motor for optical part 24-02940
Assembly of optical unit 23-02941
Assembly of light measurement unit 24-02942
Assembly of light measurement 24-03013
Head-amp print circuit board 01-02620
PI-Assembly of optical part 24-02918
Assembly of cover for maintenance 23-02928
Main print circuit board 01-02574
Assembly of thermistor 24-03050
Assembly of under cover 23-02924
Driver print circuit board 01-02602
Assembly of external output 24-02925
Assembly of front cover 24-02927
2-2
2. Drawings
1) Main Unit
Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

− ① Adjusting main unit
Adjusting automatic start sensor
Adjusting incoming strip sensing PI
Checking height of test strip feed table
Color tone and Dip detection adjustment
5 6
2-3
Note1:When removing the assembly of under cover, with great care not to damage connecting-wire.
Item No. Qty. Parts Model No. Specification Item Code Cont.
1 1 Assembly of lever for conveyance Lever for conveyance 96433 1
2 1 Assembly of table(C) for conveyance Tray for conveyance 96434 1
3 1 Assembly of table Tray 96430 1
4 1 Assembly of lever for introduction Arm 96432 1
5 1 Assembly of front cover - -
6 1 VR cover - -
7 1 Assembly of under cover - -
8 1 Waste Box 96431 1
9 1 Assembly of cover for maintenance - -
2-4
2) Assembly of cover for maintenance

① ② −
1 2 3 4 5
Removal:
(M3:Screw)
6 7 8 9 10
11
Fig:Removing cover(SUS)
2-5
1 1 Key switch Set(①＋②) 96469 1
2 1 Plate - -
3 1 Paper cutter 96480 1
4 1 Printer 96470 1
5 1 Paper cover 96478 1
6 2 Spring - -
7 1 Button(R) - -
8 1 Button(L) - -
9 1 Cover(SUS) - -
10 1 Main print circuit board 96451 1
11 1 Assembly of thermistor - -
2-6
3) Assembly of under cover

① ③ −
1 1 Driver print circuit board 96452 1
2 1 Assembly of external output − −
2-7
4) Assembly of Chassis

① ④ Positioning test strip with alignment arm
Adjusting height of transport lever
3
2 4
13
5
12
11
8
10
14
2-8
Item No. Qt Parts Model No. Specification Item Code Cont.

y.
1 1 Assembly of optical unit 96467 1
2 1 Assembly of table for light 96483 1
measurement
3 1 Ejector 96482 1
1 Alignment plate (Draw N0,64-08138) 96484 1
4 1 Assembly of motor (motor only : Code 96471) 96466 1
5 1 Assembly of micro-switch 96457 1
6 1 Assembly(adhesion) of table(R) 96465 1
for conveyance
7 1 Assembly(L) of mechanism for 96463 1
alignment
8 1 Assembly of photo-sensor 96456 1
9 1 Assembly of drive part for 96460 1
introduction
10 1 Assembly of table base 96461 1
11 1 Assembly(R) of mechanism for 96462 1
alignment
12 1 Assembly of table(Lt) for 96479 1
conveyance
13 1 Assembly of drive part for 96464 1
conveyance
14 1 PI-Assembly of drive part for 96453 1
introduction
2-9
5) Assembly of Optical Unit

①-④ ⑤ -
4
1 2 3
5 6
1 1 Nut 96481 1
2 1 Drive screw(M6P1.5) - -
3 1 PI-Assembly of optical unit 96455 1
4 1 Belt 174-2GT-3 96477 1
5 1 Assembly of light measurement 96468 1
6 1 CU-joiner FCUJ(1.0)-10F-650-10S5 96472 1
2-10
6）Assembly of table base

①-④ ⑥ -
3 4
5
2
1 ７
1 1 Plate - -
2 1 Photo-IC TPS816 - -
3 1 AUTO-START print circuit board - -
4 1 LED LSF880N2 - -
5 1 LED block - -
6 1 Optical-block(A) - -
7 1 Black-seal - -
2-11
7) Assembly of drive part for introduction

①-④ ⑦
2 1
Conclusion(×3)
1 1 Assembly of DC-motor (For introduction) 96459 1
2 2 Bush(#80) 80B-0503 − −
3 1 Pinion − −
2-12
8) Assembly of drive part for conveyance

①-④ ⑧
2 3 4
1
6
x3
Note:When this unit is decomposed, adjustment with a Exclusive use jig is needed.
Assembly of DC-motor,Coupling, Polyurethane circle belt, PI-Assembly of drive part for

conveyance is exchangeable (Refter to page.2-8)
1 1 Assembly of DC-motor (For conveyance) 96458 1
2 1 Coupling GJ5(4-3) 96475 1
3 1 Polyurethane circle belt MBN3-180 96476 1
4 1 Assembly of lever frame - -
5 1 PI-Assembly of drive part for 96454 1
conveyance
6 3 Bush(#80) 80F-0406 96474 1
2-13
Chapter 3 Service Mode AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 Service Mode Specifications (Rev. A) From V1.14 and 1.13C

<CONTENTS>
1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 4
2 Analytical curve ............................................................................................................................................... 5

Calibration curve with Chinese specifications........................................................................................................... 6
2-1 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AE4020 mg], [W AE4020 mg], [M AE4020 mg], [C AE4020 mg])........... 7
2-2 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AE4020 SI], [W AE4020 SI], [M AE4020 SI], [C AE4020 SI2]) ............... 8
2-3 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AJ4270 mg], [W AJ4270 mg], [M AJ4270 mg], [C AJ4270 mg]) .............. 9
2-4 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AJ4270 SI], [W AJ4270 SI], [M AJ4270 SI], [C AJ4270 SI2] )................ 10
2-5 AE-4020 (Operation display [C AE4020 SI1]) ............................................................................................ 11
2-6 AE-4020 (Operation display [C AJ4270 SI1])……………………………………………… ………….....12
2-7 Change in analytical curve……………………………………………………………………………........ 13
3 Entering/exiting service mode ...................................................................................................................... 14

3-1 Upon power-up............................................................................................................................................ 14
3-2 Entering reverse mode while waiting for measurement .............................................................................. 15
3-3 Exiting service mode ................................................................................................................................... 15
4 Screen flowchart ............................................................................................................................................ 17
5 Operation of function .................................................................................................................................... 21

5-1 Item No. 100: Print parameter ..................................................................................................................... 21
5-2 Item No. 110: Print parameter No. list ........................................................................................................ 22
5-3 Item No. 120: Select analytical curve.......................................................................................................... 23
5-4 Item No. 130: Set No. of test strip dispositions........................................................................................... 24
5-5 Item No. 131: Set No. of surplus urine suctions.......................................................................................... 24
5-6 Item No. 132: Set date printing ................................................................................................................... 25
5-7 Item No. 133: Select with/without temperature correction ......................................................................... 25
5-8 Item No. 134: Select temperature output..................................................................................................... 26
5-9 Item No. 135: Select with/without specific gravity correction.................................................................... 26
5-10 Item No. 136: Select check measurement print........................................................................................... 27
5-11 Item No. 137: Select measurement auto stop .............................................................................................. 27
5-12 Item No. 138: Eliminate effect of creatinine on albumin ............................................................................ 28
5-13 Item No. 139: Detect DIP............................................................................................................................ 28
5-14 Item No. 140: Set qualitative value indication format................................................................................. 29
5-15 Item No. 141: Select JCCLS print............................................................................................................... 29
5-16 Item No. 142: Select ID# setting ................................................................................................................. 30
5-17 Item No. 143: Unused ID# setting............................................................................................................... 30
5-18 Item No. 300: Set communication port ....................................................................................................... 32
5-19 Item No. 301: Set communication format ................................................................................................... 32
5-20 Item No. 302: Set communication speed..................................................................................................... 33
5-21 Item No. 303: Set time gap between communication blocks ...................................................................... 33
5-22 Item No. 304: Set S.G. external output destination...................................................................................... 34
5-23 Item No. 310: Set communication timeout 1 (required in two-way communication) ................................. 35
5-24 Item No. 313: Set No. of retransmissions (required in two-way communication) ...................................... 35
5-25 Item No. 314: Set communication standby time 1 (required in two-way communication)......................... 36
5-26 Item No. 315: Set communication standby time 2 (required in two-way communication)......................... 37
3-1
5-27 Item No. 320: Set device ID (0: fixed) ........................................................................................................ 38

5-28 Item No. 321: Set IP address (required in Ethernet communication) .......................................................... 39
5-29 Item No. 322: Set sub-net masking (required in Ethernet communication) ................................................ 40
5-30 Item No. 323: Set default gateway (required in Ethernet communication) ................................................. 41
5-31 Item No. 324: Set DHCP (required in Ethernet communication)................................................................ 42
5-32 Item No. 400: Test operation of system (single unit operation) .................................................................. 43
5-33 Item No. 410: Test operation of system (total, continuous)......................................................................... 44
5-34 Item No. 420: Adjust system (photometric section light intensity) ............................................................. 45
5-35 Item No. 421: Check levelness.................................................................................................................... 46
5-36 Item No. 430: Adjust waiting position of introduction lever....................................................................... 47
5-37 Item No. 440: Adjust surplus urine suction position of introduction lever.................................................. 48
5-38 Item No. 450: Adjust transport lever waiting position ................................................................................ 49
5-39 Item No. 460: Adjust photometric section left side waiting position .......................................................... 50
5-40 Item No. 470: Adjust black mark detection pulse (mark at right) ............................................................... 51
5-41 Item No. 471: Adjust black mark detection pulse (mark at left).................................................................. 52
5-42 Item No. 480: Adjust color tone (calculate C/M, Y/M, C/r correction value) ............................................. 53
5-43 Item No. 490: Set 430 nm wavelength correction (not used) ...................................................................... 54
5-48 Item No. 500: Display incoming strip detection level................................................................................. 56
5-49 Item No. 510: Display temperature ............................................................................................................. 56
5-50 Item No. 520: Input introduction lever waiting position (time: ms)............................................................ 57
5-51 Item No. 521: Input surplus urine suction position of introduction lever (time: ms) .................................. 57
5-52 Item No. 522: Input transport lever waiting position (time: ms) ................................................................. 58
5-53 Item No. 523: Input photometric section left waiting position pulse .......................................................... 58
5-54 Item No. 524: Set drive pulse for right drive photometric section 1 (mark at right) ................................... 59
5-55 Item No. 525: Set drive pulse for left drive photometric section 1 (mark at right) ..................................... 59
5-56 Item No. 526: Set drive pulse for right drive photometric section 2 (mark at left) ..................................... 60
5-57 Item No. 527: Set drive pulse for left drive photometric section 2 (mark at left) ....................................... 60
5-58 Item No. 528: Set color tone (C/M correction) ........................................................................................... 61
5-59 Item No. 529: Set color tone (Y/M correction) ........................................................................................... 61
5-60 Item No. 530: Set color tone (C/r correction).............................................................................................. 62
5-61 Item No. 531: Set DIP detect threshold ....................................................................................................... 62
5-62 Item No. 550: Change analytical curve information (threshold, abnormal mark rank)............................... 64
5-63 Item No. 560: Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, PRO reference................................................................ 66
5-64 Item No. 561: Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, CRE reference................................................................ 66
5-65 Item No. 600: Aution Net (entering information on analytical curve through PC) ..................................... 68
5-66 Item No. 610: Set test strip to be selected ................................................................................................... 69
5-67 Item No. 700: Set device serial number ....................................................................................................... 71
5-68 Item No. 701: Settings specific to place of destination ................................................................................ 71
5-69 Item No. 710: Set upper limit of reflectance ................................................................................................ 73
5-70 Item No. 711: Print sample error mark......................................................................................................... 73
5-71 Item No. 712: Set abnormal color detection................................................................................................. 74
5-72 Item No. 900: Clear memory....................................................................................................................... 75
5-73 Item No. 990: Initialize EEPROM .............................................................................................................. 75
6 Item No. 142: The operation method at the time of AJ system selection. ................................................... 77
6-1 Select the measurement mode ........................................................................................................................... 77
6-2 Enter a Patient ID No. ....................................................................................................................................... 77
3-2
6-3 After entering all the Patient ID Nos................................................................................................................. 77
7 Operation of function (Rev.A)……………………………………………………………………….….... ... 81

5-18 Item No. 144: Auto-start check setting......................................................................................................... 78
5-19 Item No. 145: Continous measurement mode settings ................................................................................. 78
5-20 Item No. 146:Operation setting at time of test strip error (T-137, T-138) .................................................... 79
5-21 Item No. 147: Eliminate effect of creatinine on protein ............................................................................... 79
3-3
1 General
Service mode, the following functions can be used.
Device status initialization

Analytical curve selection
System parameter setting
Device status printing
System operation test
System adjustment
Changing analytical curve information (threshold, abnormal mark rank)
(Threshold contained in Chinese version ROM cannot be changed.)
Setting color tone
Entering analytical curve information from PC
(This function is not contained in Chinese version ROM.)
As device settings, 3-digit item number and corresponding numeric figures are entered.
An item is given a number within No. 100 group or No. 200 group, depending on its function.
Configuration of screen and key assignment are sama as for normal mode. The following are functional
descriptions.
3-4
2 Analytical curve (Rev. A)

The AE-4020 urine analyzer is used not only in Japan but in many countries. It must be capable of processing various analytical curves by offering simple and easier changeover
feature. These functions are all programmed and contained in ROM as default settings. Default analytical curve is 1. [W AE4020 mg] present unit (mg/dL). Selection of analytical
curve is made in Service mode.
Screen display Sales area Rank display Value Applicable test strips Remarks
1. ［J AE4020 mg］ Domestic (Japan) AE-4020 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,9EA,8EA,7EA,6EA,5EA,4EA,2AC,
10PA,9UB,8UA,8UB,7UA,7UB,5UA,5UB,
4UA,5EB,6EB,9EB,10PB,3FA,5FA
2. ［J AE-4020 SI］ Domestic (Japan) AE-4020 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,9EA,8EA,7EA,6EA,5EA,4EA,2AC,
10PA,9UB,8UA,8UB,7UA,7UB,5UA,5UB,
4UA,5EB,6EB,9EB,10PB,3FA,5FA
3. ［J AJ4270 mg］ Domestic (Japan) AJ-4270 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,9EA,8EA,7EA,6EA,5EA,4EA,2AC, Negative displays are outputted under the old
10PA,9UB,8UA,8UB,7UA,7UB,5UA,5UB, format
4UA,5EB,6EB,9EB,10PB,3FA,5FA GLU: NORMAL、LEU：NEG．
4. ［J AJ-4270 SI］ Domestic (Japan) AJ-4270 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,9EA,8EA,7EA,6EA,5EA,4EA,2AC, Negative displays are outputted under the old
10PA,9UB,8UA,8UB,7UA,7UB,5UA,5UB, format
4UA,5EB,6EB,9EB,10PB,3FA,5FA GLU：NORMAL、LEU：NEG．
5. ［W AE4020 mg］ Overseas (general) AE-4020 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,10PA,2AC Only difference with 1: App. test strips
6. ［W AE-4020 SI］ Overseas (general) AE-4020 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,10PA,2AC Only difference with 2: App. test strips
7. ［W AJ4270 mg］ Overseas (general) AJ-4270 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,10PA,2AC Only difference with 3: App. test strips
8. ［W AJ-4270 SI］ Overseas (general) AJ-4270 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,10PA,2AC Only difference with 4: App. test strips
9. ［M AE-4020 mg］ MENARINI AE-4020 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,2AC,10PA,9UB Only difference with 1: App. test strips
10PA,2AC: added in service settings.
(Default: off)
10. ［M AE-4020 SI］ MENARINI AE-4020 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,2AC,10PA,9UB Only difference with 2: App. test strips
(Default: off)
11. ［M AJ4270 mg］ MENARINI AJ-4270 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,2AC,10PA,9UB Only difference with 3: App. test strips
(Default: off)
12. ［M AJ-4270 SI］ MENARINI AJ-4270 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,2AC,10PA,9UB Only difference with 4: App. test strips
(Default: off)
3-5
Calibration curve with Chinese specifications

Display Sales area Rank display Value Applicable test strips Remarks
1. [C AE-4020 SI1] China AE-4020 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,10PA,2AC Item units outputted as below:。
PRO:mg/L CRE:mmol/L A/C:mg/mmol
P/C:mg/mmol
2. [C AE4020 SI2] China AE-4020 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,10PA,2AC Item units outputted as below:。
PRO:g/L CRE:g/L A/C:mg/gCr P/C:mg/gCr
3. [C AE4020 mg] China AE-4020 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,10PA,2AC
4. [C AJ4270 SI1] China AJ-4270 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,10PA,2AC Diff with 1: Negative displays are outputted
under the old format
GLU：NORMAL、LEU：NEG．
5. [C AJ-4270 SI2] China AJ-4270 SI(mmol/L) 10EA,10PA,2AC Diff. with 2: Negative displays are outputted
6. [C AJ-4270 mg] China AJ-4270 Present unit(mg/dL) 10EA,10PA,2AC Diff. with 3: Negative displays are outputted
Rev. A
3-6
2-1 AE-4020 ( Operation display [J AE4020 mg], [W AE4020 mg], [M AE4020 mg], [C AE4020 mg] )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GLU Qualitative value - +- +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 OVER
PRO Qualitative value - +- +- 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
BIL Qualitative value - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 OVER
URO Qualitative value NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 2 3 4 6 8 12 OVER
PH Measurement result 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0
S.G. Measurement result <1.005 1.010 1.015 1.020 1.025 >1.030
BLD Qualitative value - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 0.03 0.06 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 OVER
KET Qualitative value - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 OVER
NIT Qualitative value - 1+ 2+
LEU Qualitative value -
Semiquantitative value (Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500
ALB Semiquantitative value (mg/L) 10 30 80 150 OVER
CRE Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 10 50 100 200 300 OVER
A/C Qualitative value NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+
Semiquantitative value (mg/gCr) <30 100 200 >300 OVER
P/C Qualitative value DILUTE NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+
Indicates a rank to which abnormal mark is applied.

The abnormal mark is not applied to PH, S.G., and CRE.
"DILUTE" of P/C will be printed when it matches PRO, CRE reflectance set by service, system.
3-7
2-2 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AE4020 SI], [W AE4020 SI], [M AE4020 SI], [C AE4020 SI2] )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Semiquantitative value (mmol/L) 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11 17 28 56 OVER
PRO Semiquantitative symbol - +- +- 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Value (g/L) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 OVER
BIL Semiquantitative symbol - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Value (umol/L) 8.5 17 34 50 70 100 140 170 OVER
URO Semiquantitative symbol NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Value (umol/L) 34 50 70 100 140 200 OVER
BLD Semiquantitative symbol - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+
Value (mg/L) 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 OVER
KET Semiquantitative symbol - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Value (mmol/L) 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 OVER
NIT Semiquantitative symbol - 1+ 2+
LEU Semiquantitative symbol -
Value (Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500
CRE Semiquantitative value (g/L) 0.1 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 OVER

3-8
2-3 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AJ4270 mg], [W AJ4270 mg], [M AJ4270 mg], [C AJ4270 mg] )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GLU Qualitative value NORMAL +- +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
PRO Qualitative value - +- +- 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
BIL Qualitative value - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 0.5 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 OVER
URO Qualitative value NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 2 3 4 6 8 12 OVER
BLD Qualitative value - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 0.03 0.06 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 OVER
KET Qualitative value - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 10 20 40 60 80 100 150 OVER
NIT Qualitative value - 1+ 2+
LEU Qualitative value NEG.
Semiquantitative value (Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500
CRE Semiquantitative value (mg/dL) 10 50 100 200 300 OVER

* Negative notation of qualitative value is different from "W AE4020 mg" in the following items. (old format)
GLU: NORMAL, LEU: NEG.
3-9
2-4 AE-4020 (Operation display [J AJ4270 SI], [W AJ4270 SI], [M AJ4270 SI], [C AJ4270 SI2] )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GLU Qualitative value NORMAL +- +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Semiquantitative value (mmol/L) 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11 17 28 56 OVER
PRO Semiquantitative symbol - +- +- 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Value (g/L) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 OVER
BIL Semiquantitative symbol - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Value (umol/L) 8.5 17 34 50 70 100 140 170 OVER
URO Semiquantitative symbol NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Value (umol/L) 34 50 70 100 140 200 OVER
BLD Semiquantitative symbol - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+
Value (mg/L) 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 OVER
KET Semiquantitative symbol - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Value (mmol/L) 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 OVER
NIT Semiquantitative symbol - 1+ 2+
LEU Semiquantitative symbol NEG.
Value (Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500
CRE Semiquantitative value (g/L) 0.1 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 OVER

* Negative notation of qualitative value is different from "W AE4020 SI" in the following items. (old format)
GLU: NORMAL, LEU: NEG.
3-10
2-5 AE-4020 ( Operation display [C AE4020 SI1] )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Semi-quantitative 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11 17 28 56 OVER
value(mmol/L)
PRO Ref. mark - +- +- 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Conc.(mg/L) 100 200 300 500 700 1000 2000 3000 6000 OVER
BIL Ref. mark - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Conc.(umol/L) 8.5 17 34 50 70 100 140 170 OVER
URO Ref. mark NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Conc.(umol/L) 34 50 70 100 140 200 OVER
PH Measurement value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0
S.G. Measurement value <1.005 1.010 1.015 1.020 1.025 >1.030
BLD Ref. mark - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+
Conc.(mg/L) 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 OVER
KET Ref. mark - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Conc.(mmol/L) 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 OVER
NIT Ref. mark - 1+ 2+
LEU Ref. mark -
Conc.(Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500
ALB Semi-quantitative 10 30 80 150 OVER
value(mg/L)
CRE Semi-quantitative 0.9 4.4 8.8 17.7 26.5 OVER
value(mmol/L)
Semi-quantitative <3.4 11.3 22.6 >34 OVER
value(mg/mmol)
value(mg/mmol)
Rev.A
denotes rank with error value mark
There are no error value marks for PH, SG and CRE.The ‘DILUTE’ for P/C is printed when the reflectance for PRO and CRE (set in Service, system) match.
3-11
2-6 AE-4020 ( Operation display [C AJ4270 SI1] )

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Semi-quantitative 1.7 2.8 3.9 5.6 8.3 11 17 28 56 OVER
value(mmol/L)
PRO Ref. mark - +- +- 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Conc.(mg/L) 100 200 300 500 700 1000 2000 3000 6000 OVER
BIL Ref. mark - 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Conc.(umol/L) 8.5 17 34 50 70 100 140 170 OVER
URO Ref. mark NORMAL 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+
Conc.(umol/L) 34 50 70 100 140 200 OVER
PH Measurement value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0
S.G. Measurement value <1.005 1.010 1.015 1.020 1.025 >1.030
BLD Ref. mark - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+
Conc.(mg/L) 0.3 0.6 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 OVER
KET Ref. mark - +- 1+ 1+ 2+ 2+ 3+ 3+ 4+ 4+
Conc.(mmol/L) 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 OVER
NIT Ref. mark - 1+ 2+
LEU Ref. mark -
Conc.(Leu/uL) 25 75 250 500
ALB Semi-quantitative 10 30 80 150 OVER
value(mg/L)
CRE Semi-quantitative 0.9 4.4 8.8 17.7 26.5 OVER
value(mmol/L)
value(mg/mmol)
value(mg/mmol)
Rev. A
denotes rank with error value mark
There are no error value marks for PH, S.G and CRE.
The ‘DILUTE’ for P/C is printed when the reflectance for PRO and CRE (set in Service, system) match.
* CAE-4020 SI1: negative display of a qualitative value differs from items below.（Old format）- GLU：NORMAL LEU: NEG．
3-12
2-7 Change in analytical curve
For selecting method of analytical curve, refer to "Select analytical curve" described later in this document.
Item name, semiquantitative symbol and concentration are reflected upon printing and external output. The unit
can use the following external output formats: AE-4020, AX-4280 (SA-4250 compatible), ticket printer
(AJ-4270), AM-4290 and MA-4240.
Note that AJ-4270 is not included in format selection options because it may be considered equivalent of AX-4280
format when used with S.G. external output position setting.
As an independent device, the analyzer accepts manual change of rank threshold and abnormal mark ranks except
for relative density (threshold in ROM for China cannot be changed). However, printing order of items,
transmission order of items, semiquantitative symbol of item, concentration, and detailed information on
color tone cannot be changed by the analyzer itself.
When it is necessary to change these items, connect external output terminal of the analyzer to RS-232C terminal
of the PC through a cross cable and use "Analytical curve input program" on the PC. (This feature cannot be
used when ROM for China is installed.)
3-13
3 Entering/exiting service mode

To enter the service mode, proceed to either 3-1 or 3-2
3-1 Upon power-up
(1) Turn on the power while pressing STOP key.
(2) The screen as shown below will pop up. To enter through the service mode, type "-4020-".
The number of settable items is refer to "Functions and item No."
Enter the password from "-" and "0"

PASS [ ] through "9" keys.
"-" is displayed but password is not.
PASS [------] Press ENTER key.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the password is compared with stored one. As both match, the screen changes
to step (3) Self-diagnosis screen. If a wrong password, it is cleared, requiring the correct password input.
(3) The self-diagnosis screen will appear. Wait for approx. 10 seconds.
AE-4020 01.00
(4) The item No. input screen (reverse mode) will appear.
No. 000
If the following screen appears in place of the screen described in (4) above, it indicates a warning.
{ EEPROM failure
T001 Ent
This massage implies that the problem is associated with main ROM, for example, version up
related problem. Press ENTER key and the item No. input screen will appear. Perform "Initialize
EEPROM". Never use functions other than "Initialize EEPROM" in this case.
Should "T001 Ent" appear while the ROM version is kept unchanged, the board may be defective.
{ Power failure
E001 Ent
This warning will appear when power failure occurs during measurement.
3-14
{ Version change
T102 Ent
This warning will appear when version of main ROM is upgraded.
Pressing ENTER clears all backup data.
{ Backup voltage drop
E002 Ent
This warning will appear when the voltage of battery used to retain data, e.g. measurements, drops
or the data is lost.
When the voltage is low, leave the power supply on to charge the battery.
Pressing ENTER clears all backup data.
As described before, if a wrong password is typed, the screen clears it and waits for correct password
without entering service mode.
To prevent from changing to service mode while typing the password, press STOP key. The standby
screen will pop up after completion of system initialization.
3-2 Entering reverse mode while waiting for measurement
(1) To enter service mode, type "-4020-" while waiting for measurement.
MEAS.
No. 000 10EA
If reverse mode menu screen will not appear after typing "-4020-", press a numeric key and then
type "-4020-" again.
(2) When "-4020-"is accepted, service mode item No. input screen appears.
No. 000
3-3 Exiting service mode
(1) In service mode item No. input screen, press STOP key.
No. 000
3-15
(2) System initialization process starts in the same way as in the case of power up.
12:34
(3) At the end of initialization, measurement standby screen appears.
CAUTION: During service mode entering process, measurement start No. and measurement type will be
changed upon typing the password. Note the changes when returning from the service mode during
measurement.
3-16
4 Screen flowchart
Power ON
Full screen
ROM version Press STOP key -4020- to service mode
AE-4020 01.00 PASS [------]
System initialization
20
Standby screen
MEAS
No. 001 10EA -4020- to service mode
Print parameter
No. 000 No. 100 1

0-6
↑
Print parameter No. list
No. 110 0-1
Select analytical curve Check EEP writing
No. 120 1 No. 120 0-1 EEP 0-1
Select with/without temperature

Set No. of test strip dispositions Set No. of surplus urine suctions Set date printing Select temperature output Select with/without specific gravity correction
correction
No. 130 100 No. 131 200 No. 132 0 No. 133 1 No. 134 1 No. 135 1
Select measurement Eliminate effect of creatinine on

Select check measurement print Detect DIP Set rank symbol Select JCCLS print
auto stop albumin
No. 136 0 No. 137 1 No. 138 1 No. 139 1 No. 140 0 No. 141 0
Select ID# setting Unused ID# Check EEP writing
No. 142 0 No. 143 0 EEP 0-1
Set time gap between Set S.G. external output

Set communication port Set communication format Set communication speed Check EEP writing
communication blocks destination
No. 300 0 No. 301 0 No. 302 5 No. 303 005 No. 304 0 EEP 0-1
Set communication timeout 1 Set No. of retransmissions Set communication standby time 1 Set communication standby time 2
No. 310 15 No. 313 06 No. 314 10 No. 315 01
Check EEP writing
EEP 0-1
Set device ID
No. 320 0
Set IP address
No. 321-1 192 No. 321-2 168 No. 321-3 225 No. 321-4 001
Set sub-net masking
No. 322-1 255 No. 322-2 255 No. 322-3 255 No. 322-4 255
Set default gateway
No. 323-1 192 No. 323-2 168 No. 323-3 225 No. 323-4 001
Set DHCP Check EEP writing
No. 324 1 EEP 0-1
3-17
Test operation of system

(single unit operation)
No. 000 No. 400 No. 400 100100
↑
Test operation of system
(total, continuous)
No. 410 No. 410 0-2 No. 410 00 15
Adjust system
(photometric section light intensity)
No. 420 -430- 2500 -565- 2500 -635- 2500 -760- 2500 -000- 150
Adjust levelness
No. 421 No. 421 ------ No. 421 STA
Adjust introduction waiting position Check EEP writing
No. 430 0 EEP 0-1
Adjust introduction surplus urine suction

Check EEP writing
position
No. 440 760 0 EEP 0-1
Adjust transport lever waiting position Check EEP writing
No. 450 10 EEP 0-1
Adjust photometric section left side waiting

Check EEP writing
position
No. 460 [67] 1-9 EEP 0-1
Adjust black mark pulse (mark at right) Check EEP writing
No. 470 No. 470 ------ No. 470 STA No. 470 1748 707 EEP 0-1
Adjust black mark pulse (mark at left) Check EEP writing
No. 471 No. 471 ------ No. 471 STA No. 471 698 1748 EEP 0-1
Adjust color tone Check EEP writing
No. 480 1 No. 480 ------ No. 480 STA No. 470 0 1 EEP 0-1
Display incoming strip detection level
No. 500 68
Display temperature
No. 510 27.1
Enter introduction surplus urine suction Set photometric section Set photometric section
Enter introduction waiting position Input transport lever waiting position Enter photometric section left waiting position
position right drive pulse 1 right drive pulse 2
No. 520 0 No. 521 0 No. 522 10 No. 523 67 No. 524 1654 No. 525 713
Set photometric section left drive pulse 1 Set photometric section left drive pulse 2 Set color tone (C/M correction) Set color tone (Y/M correction) Set color tone (C/r correction) Set DIP detect threshold
No. 526 704 No. 527 1663 No. 528 1000 No. 529 1000 No. 530 1000 No. 531 923
Change analytical curve information Check EEP writing
No. 550 01 No. 550 01 No. 01 80.0 No. 02 30 72.0 EEP 0-1
Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, PRO Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, CRE Check EEP writing
No. 560 96.0 No. 561 24.0 EEP 0-1
Aution net Check EEP writing
No. 600 AE-4020 01.00 --------- EEP 0-1
Set test strip to be selected Check EEP writing
No. 610 No. 610 10EA 1 No. 610 9EA 1 EEP 0-1
Set device serial number Check EEP writing
No. 700 No. 700 00000000 EEP 0-1
Settings specific to place of destination Check EEP writing
No. 701 0 EEP 0-1
Set upper limit of reflectance Print sample error mark Set abnormal color detection Check EEP writing
No. 710 120 No. 711 1 No. 712 1 EEP 0-1
Clear memory
No. 900 No. 900 0-1
Initialize EEPROM
No. 990 No. 990 0-1 No. 990 0-2
3-18
Functions and item No. (550-610 are not available on Chinese version) Rev. A
Default Mode
Function Item No. Unit Input range
value Service Mode
Print parameter 100 1 - 0 to 6 {
Print parameter No. list 110 - - - {
Measurement related process settings
Select analytical curve 120 1 - 1 to {
Set No. of test strip dispositions times 0,100 to 200 {
Set No. of surplus urine suctions 131 200 times 0,200 to 400 {
Set date printing 132 1 - 0 to 2 {
Select with/without temperature 133 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
correction
Select temperature output 134 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
Select with/without specific gravity 135 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
correction
Select check measurement print 136 0 - 0 to 3 {
Select measurement auto stop 137 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
Eliminate effect of creatinine on albumin 138 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
With/without DIP detection 139 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
Set qualitative value indication format 140 0 - 0 to 2 {
Select JCCLS print 141 0 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
Select ID# setting 142 0 - 0 or 1 {
Unused ID# 143 0 - 0 or 1 {
Auto-start check setting 144 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
Continous measurement mode 145 0 - 0 or 1 {
settings
Operation setting at time of test 146 0 - 0 or 1 {
strip error (T-137, T-138)
Eliminate effect of creatinine on 147 0 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
protein
External output settings
Set communication port 300 0 - 0 to 1 {
Set communication format 301 0 - 0 to 4 {
Set communication speed 302 5 - 0 to 6 {
Set time gap between communication 303 005 0.1 sec 001 to 999 {
blocks
Set S.G. external output destination 304 0 - 0 to 2 {
Set communication timeout 1 310 15 sec 01 to 99 {
Set No. of retransmissions 313 06 times 01 to 99 {
Set communication standby time 1 314 10 sec 01 to 99 {
Set communication standby time 2 315 01 sec 01 to 99 {
Ethernet settings
Set device ID 320 000 - 000 to 255 {
Set IP address 321 000 - 000 to 255 {
Set sub-net masking 322 000 - 000 to 255 {
Set default gateway 323 000 - 000 to 255 {
Set DHCP 324 0 OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
System test and adjustment
Test operation of system (single unit 400 - - 0 to 8 {
operation)
Test operation of system (total, 410 - - 0 to 1 {
continuous)
Adjust system (photometric section light 420 - - 0, 1, 4, 7, 3, 6, 9, {
3-19
Default Mode
Function Item No. Unit Input range
value Service Mode
intensity) START
Check levelness 421 - - - {
Adjust waiting position of introduction 430 0 msec 0, 1, 4, 7, 3, 6, 9, {
lever ENTER, START
Adjust surplus urine suction position of 440 0 msec 0, 1, 4, 7, 3, 6, 9, {
introduction lever ENTER, START
Adjust transport lever waiting position 450 50 msec 1, 3, ENTER, START {
Adjust photometric section left side 460 67 pulse 0, 1, 4, 7, 3, 6, 9, {
waiting position ENTER
Adjust black mark pulse (mark at right) 470 - - - {
Adjust black mark pulse (mark at left) 471 - - - {
Adjust color tone (mark at right) 480 - - - {
Set 430 nm wavelength correction 490 Not used Not used Not used {
Display incoming strip detection level 500 - - - {
Display temperature 510 - °C - {
Edit measurement related settings
Input introduction lever waiting position 520 0 msec 0001 to 9999 {
Input surplus urine suction position of 521 0 msec 0001 to 9999 {
introduction lever
Input transport lever waiting position 522 10 msec 0001 to 9999 {
Input photometric section left waiting 523 67 pulse 0001 to 9999 {
position pulse
Set photometric section right drive pulse 524 1654 pulse 0001 to 9999 {
1
Set photometric section left drive pulse 1 525 713 pulse 0001 to 9999 {
Set photometric section right drive pulse 526 704 pulse 0001 to 9999 {
2
Set photometric section left drive pulse 2 527 1663 pulse 0001 to 9999 {
Set color tone (C/M correction) 528 1.000 0.001 0000 to 9999 {
Set color tone (Y/M correction) 529 1.000 0.001 0000 to 9999 {
Set color tone (C/r correction) 530 1.000 0.001 0000 to 9999 {
Set DIP detect threshold 531 92.0 % 000 to 999 {
Information necessary for judgment
Change analytical curve information 550 0000 0.1% 0000 to 9999 {
Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, PRO 560 69.0 % 000 to 999 {
Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, CRE 561 24.0 % 000 to 999 {
Aution Net 600 - - - {
Set test strip to be selected 610 - OFF/ON 0 or 1 {
Other settings
Set device serial number 700 000000 - 00000000 to Note
99999999
Settings specific to place of destination 701 0 - 0 or 1 Note
Set upper limit of reflectance 710 120 % 000 to 999 Note
Print sample error mark 711 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 Note
Set abnormal color detection 712 1 OFF/ON 0 or 1 Note
Initializing process
Clear memory 900 - - - {
Initialize EEPROM 990 - - 0 to 6 {
Note : In service mode, a setup is impossible. (Item No. 700～Item No. 712)
3-20
5 Operation of function
5-1 Item No. 100: Print parameter
This function is related to parameter setting and enables printing of various settings including service settings,
system settings, user settings, test strip information, test strip item information and color tone information.
These printing items can be individually or totally specified.
(1) In the item No. input screen, press keys "1", "0" and "0" in this order.
No. 100 Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
Press STOP key to exit reverse mode.
(2) Using keys "0" through "5", choose settings to be printed.
No. 100 1 Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
The following items can be selected.

1: Service settings or system settings
2: User settings
3: Test strip information
4: Test strip item information
5: Color tone information
6: Pulse setting information
0: All 0-5 information.
Pressing STOP key returns back to the item No. input screen.
When 3: Test strip information or 4: Test strip item information is selected, printing information can be
selected individually - go to step (3) below. Otherwise, the screen described in step (4) below will pop up.
(3) From keys "0" through "6", select the No. of table to be printed.
For test strip information, 01 to 32 can be input (32: print all tables).
No. 100-3 01 Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
For test strip item information, 00 to 17 can be input (17: print all tables).
(4) Printing
No. 100
Print mark During printing, a print mark (printer mark) is lit.
At the end of printing, the item No. input screen will appear.
3-21
5-2 Item No. 110: Print parameter No. list
This function is related to parameter setting and enables to print the setting item No. list.
Press STOP key to exit service mode.
(2) Print confirmation screen will appear. To start printing, press "1" key.
No. 110 0-1

"0" key: unit returns to the item No. input screen without printing.
"1" key: unit returns to the item No. input screen after printing.
(3) Printing
No. 110
Print mark During printing, a print mark (printer mark) is lit.
At the end of printing, the item No. input screen will appear.
3-22
5-3 Item No. 120: Select analytical curve
Selects the information analytical curve (test strip information, test strip item information) described previously
and stores the information on EEPROM.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", select the analytical curve information.
For types of analytical curve, refer to "2. Analytical curve".

Upon pressing STOP key, the unit returns to the item No. input screen without setting analytical curve.
(3) Overwrite confirmation screen will appear. Press "1" key when overwriting.
No. EEP 0-1

The unit overwrites the analytical curve setting and returns to the item No. input screen.
If "0" key is pressed, the unit returns to the item No. input screen without overwriting.
(4) Overwrite initialization reconfirmation screen will appear. Press "2" key when initializing and
overwriting.
No. EEP 0-2

After initialization, the screen returns to the item No. input screen.
If "0" key is pressed, the unit returns to the item No. input screen without doing initialization.
CAUTION: Selecting analytical curve clears backup data.
Selecting analytical curve is to overwrite all test strip information and item information contained
in EEPROM. When threshold, printing order, etc., have been changed, save the stored
information (e.g. print the test strip item information) before selecting analytical curve.
Do not turn off power during writing.
3-23
5-4 Item No. 130: Set No. of test strip dispositions
The unit counts the test strips measured after power-up. When the counting becomes equal to "No. of test strip
dispositions minus 10", the screen blinks FULL icon. Input range is 000 or 100-200 (100 by default). (On
power-up, be sure to dispose the test strips of the waste box. If 000 is selected, FULL icon is not displayed.
Even if set to 000, measurement data will be affected as waste box overflows with test strips. This is to be
taken into consideration when changing setting.)
(2) From numeric keys 0-9, type the number of test strip dispositions.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit acknowledges the input and goes to the input screen (2) of the item
No. 131: Set No. of surplus urine suctions.
Upon pressing STOP key, the unit ignores the input value and returns back to the item No. input screen.
5-5 Item No. 131: Set No. of surplus urine suctions
Set No. of surplus urine suctions to be performed. The unit counts the test strips measured after power-up. When
the counting becomes equal to or more "No. of surplus urine suctions minus 10", the screen blinks FULL icon.
Input range is 000 or 200-400 (200 by default). Do not set to a value between 001 and 010.
(2) From numeric keys 0-9, type the number of surplus urine suctions.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the screen changes to the input screen (2) of the item No. 132.
If STOP key is pressed instead, the unit ignores the input value and returns back to the item No. input
screen. See Note 1.)
(No figure is displayed if 000 is set. If a large number of test strips are measured, measurement data
will be affected.)
3-24
5-6 Item No. 132: Set date printing
Set the printing format of date. Select "Year, Month, Day", "Month, Day, Year" or "Day, Month, Year". Default is
"Year, Month, Day". (Does not affect external output.)
(2) Choose the desired print format by typing 0, 1 or 2.

0: Year, Month, Day
1: Month, Day, Year
2: Day, Month, Year
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the item No. 133 Input screen (2).
If STOP key is pressed, the unit ignores the input value and returns back to the item No. input screen.
Note 1)
5-7 Item No. 133: Select with/without temperature correction
Set temperature correction ON or OFF. Select either ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Factory setting is ON. (If OFF
(disable) is selected, temperature data is not output.)
(2) Use "1" key when using correcting function. Otherwise, use "0".
0: "OFF (disable)"
1: "ON (enable)"
Note 1)
3-25
5-8 Item No. 134: Select temperature output
Select whether to print temperature: select ON (print) or OFF (not print). Factory setting is ON. (This setting is
made invalid (even ON) if Item No. 133 is set at OFF.)
(2) Use "1" key when outputting temperature. Otherwise, press "0" key.
0: "OFF (not print)"

1: "ON (print)"
Note 1)
5-9 Item No. 135: Select with/without specific gravity correction
Determine whether to use the specific gravity correction feature by turning ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Factory
setting is ON.
(2) Press "1" key when using this feature. Otherwise, press "0" key.
0: "OFF (disable)"
1: "ON (enable)"
Note 1)
3-26
5-10 Item No. 136: Select check measurement print
Set the printing format of check measurement result. Select either "Normal", "Details", "A/D counts" or "Color
paper measurement". Factory setting is "Normal". *(Details: reflection of various wavelengths on pads 1-10;
A/D counts: A/D counts of various wavelengths on pads 1-11; Color paper measurement: 2 wavelength
reflection on various pads without temperature correction, PH correction of S.G. (BLD, 1 wavelength).
(2) Use keys "0", "1", or "2" to select ON/OFF of abnormal mark output.

0: "Normal"
1: "Details" (See Note * described above.)
2: "A/D counts"
3: "Color paper measurement"
Note 1)
5-11 Item No. 137: Select measurement auto stop

The unit stops measurement as it detects no test strip on the transport section or introduction section. Turn on or
off this measurement automatic halt feature. Factory setting is ON (enable).
0: "OFF (disable)"
1: "ON (enable)"
Note 1)
3-27
5-12 Item No. 138: Eliminate effect of creatinine on albumin
When turned on, this function eliminates effect of creatinine on albumin. To enable the eliminating function,
select ON, otherwise, select OFF. Factory setting is ON (enable).
0: "OFF (disable)"
1: "ON (enable)"
Note 1)
5-13 Item No. 139: Detect DIP
When turned on, the unit detects DIP. To enable DIP detection function, select ON, otherwise, select OFF. Factory
setting is ON (enable).
0: "OFF (disable)"
1: "ON (enable)"
Note 1)
3-28
5-14 Item No. 140: Set qualitative value indication format
Set output format of qualitative value by selecting "4+", "+4" or "++++".

Factory setting is "4+".
(2) Select desired qualitative value output format by using "0", "1" or "2" key.
0: "4+"
1: "+4"
2: "++++"
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and returns back to the item No. input screen.
Note 1)
*Note that if this output format change is ignored, the qualitative value may have been changed by
Aution net AE. To enable the new setting in Item No. 140, first change the format to "4+" through
Aution net AE and then repeat the above steps.
5-15 Item No. 141: Select JCCLS print
When enabled, unit uses JCCLS printing feature.

Factory setting is "0" (normal printing).
(2) Select desired print format by using "0" or "1" key.
0: Normal print format

1: JCCLS print format
Note 1)
Note 1)
3-29
5-16 Item No. 142: Select ID# setting
Set the condition of the barcode reading. Choose from “AE”or “AJ”.
Factory setting is "0" (AE).
0: It reads for every measurement.(AE)

1: Before measurement, it reads and is crowded with a package.(AJ)
5-17 Item No. 143: Unused ID# setting
When measurement is stopped and some patient ID Nos. are left unused, set whether to use them or to delete them
at next measurement. Choose either Use or Delete. The factory setting is Use.
Factory setting is "0" (Use).
0: Use
1: Delete
3-30
Note 1) After each setting and before returning to the item No. input screen, the EEPROM write
confirmation screen appears. To save the change on EEPROM and make it valid on the next
power-up, press "1" key. If the current modification is for temporary use and will not be used again,
press "0" key (not save to EEPROM). Upon pressing STOP key, all current modifications will be
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-31
5-18 Item No. 300: Set communication port

Set type of port for external output. Select "Ethernet" or "RS-232C".
Factory setting is "RS-232C".
(2) Select desired communication port by using "0" or "1" key.
0: "RS-232C"
1: "Ethernet"
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the communication format setting input
screen (2).
5-19 Item No. 301: Set communication format

Set type of external output format. Select either "AE-4020 (ASTM)", "AX-4280", "Ticket printer", "AM-4290",
"MA-4240" or "SA-4230". Factory setting is "AE-4020 (ASTM)".
(2) Using one of keys "0" through "5", select desired external output format.

0: "AE-4020 (ASTM)"
1: "AX-4280 (AJ-4270 compatible)"
2: "Ticket printer (AJ-4270 format)"
3: "AM-4290"
4: "MA-4240"
5: "SA-4230"
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the communication speed setting input
screen (2).
Note 1)
When outputting in AJ-4270 format, select AX-4280 and then select [output to item information area] in
Item No. 304, S.G. external output destination.
3-32
5-20 Item No. 302: Set communication speed

Set baud rate at external output. Select "300 bps", "600 bps", "1200 bps", "2400 bps", "4800 bps", "9600 bps" or
"19200 bps". Factory setting is "2400 bps". This setting is made valid when "RS-232C" is selected in Item No.
300: Set communication port. (Invalid if Ethernet is selected.)
(2) Using one of keys "0" through "6", select the desired baud rate.

0: "300 bps"
1: "600 bps"
2: "1200 bps"
3: "2400 bps"
4: "4800 bps"
5: "9600 bps"
6: "19200 bps"
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set time gap
between communication blocks.
Note 1)
5-21 Item No. 303: Set time gap between communication blocks
Set the time gap between external output data blocks in units of 0.1 sec, in the range of 001 to 999. Factory setting
is 005.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", type the desired time gap.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set external
output destination of S.G. option.
Note 1)
3-33
5-22 Item No. 304: Set S.G. external output destination
Set destination of external output of S.G. by selecting either: "Output to item information area", "Output
concentration to gravity-specific area of No. 4 block" or "Output in data format (concentration or reflection) to
gravity-specific area of No. 4 block". Factory setting is "Output to item information area". This setting is made
valid only when "AX-4280" is selected in the communication format setting option.
(2) Using key "0", "1" or "2", select the destination of S.G. external output.

0: "Output to item information area"
1: "Output concentration to gravity-specific area of No. 4 block"
2: "Output in data format (concentration or reflection) to gravity-specific area of No. 4 block"
Note 1)
Note 1)
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-34
5-23 Item No. 310: Set communication timeout 1 (required in two-way communication)
External output used in RS-232C two-way communication system. Set the ACK waiting time following
transmission of ENQ, in units of second, in the range of 01 to 99. Factory setting is 15.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", set ACK waiting time.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set
communication timeout 2.
5-24 Item No. 313: Set No. of retransmissions (required in two-way communication)
External output used in RS-232C two-way communication system. Set the No. of retransmissions upon receiving
NAK from external HOST, in the range of 01 to 99. Factory setting is 06.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", set No. of retries upon receiving NAK.
communication standby time 1.
3-35
5-25 Item No. 314: Set communication standby time 1 (required in two-way communication)
External output used in RS-232C two-way communication system. Set the standby time to be maintained upon
receiving NAK in response to transmitted ENQ, in units of second, in the range of 01 to 99. Factory setting is 10.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", enter communication standby time 1.
communication standby time 2.
Note 1)
3-36
5-26 Item No. 315: Set communication standby time 2 (required in two-way communication)
External output used in RS-232C two-way communication system. Set the standby time to be maintained upon
receiving ENQ in response to transmitted ENQ, or upon receiving NAK in response to transmitted frame, in units
of second, in the range of 01 to 99. Factory setting is 01.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", enter communication standby time 2.
Note 1)
Note 1)
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-37
5-27 Item No. 320: Set device ID (0: fixed)
Set the ID of device in the range of 000 to 255. Factory setting is 000.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", enter the device ID.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set IP address.
3-38
5-28 Item No. 321: Set IP address (required in Ethernet communication)
Set IP address used over Ethernet. An IP address is composed of 4 sets of integer (0-255).
e.g. 192. 168. 100. 1
As a rule, input a whole number 4 times.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", type IP address 1.
Press ENTER key to proceed to step (3).

Note 1)

Note 1)

Note 1)
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set sub-net
masking.
Note 1)
3-39
5-29 Item No. 322: Set sub-net masking (required in Ethernet communication)
Set sub-net masking used over Ethernet. A sub-net masking is composed of 4 sets of integer (0-255).
e.g. 255. 255. 255. 0
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", type sub-net masking 1.

Note 1)

Note 1)

Note 1)
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set default
gateway.
Note 1)
3-40
5-30 Item No. 323: Set default gateway (required in Ethernet communication)
Set default gateway used over Ethernet. A default gateway is composed of 4 sets of integer (0-255).
e.g. 192. 168. 100. 300
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", type address 1 of default gateway.

Note 1)

Note 1)

Note 1)
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the input screen (2) of Set DHCP.
Note 1)
3-41
5-31 Item No. 324: Set DHCP (required in Ethernet communication)
When connecting to Ethernet, determine whether to use DHCP. To use DHCP, select ON, otherwise select OFF.
Factory setting is OFF (not use).
(2) Using key "0" or "1", turn ON or OFF DHCP option.
0: "OFF (not use)"

1: "ON (use)"
Note 1)
Note 1) After completing the setting sequence and before returning to the item No. input screen, the
EEPROM write confirmation screen will appear if updating is required. To save the change on
EEPROM and make it valid on the next power-up, press "1" key. If the current modification is for
temporary use and will not be used again, press "0" key (not save to EEPROM). Upon pressing
STOP key, all current modifications will be undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-42
5-32 Item No. 400: Test operation of system (single unit operation)
Test individual units independently.

(This test can be run once the target units are connected. Since these target units can freely run this test
program, they may hit each other, causing damage.)
(3) State of each involved sensor is indicated by 1 or 0.
No. 400 1.0.1.1.1.0

The screen displays the state of the following sensors in the order listed.
From left to right (figures above following 400).
Introduction section Waiting position PI
Introduction section Surplus urine suction position PI
Transport section Waiting position PI
Photometric section Left waiting position PI
Auto start test strip detection PI
Incoming test strip detection PI
(4) Enter the number of section to be tested.
Key vs section
0: Introduction section, Transport section, Photometric section - Initialization
1: Introduction section Waiting position
2: Introduction section Surplus urine suction position
3: Introduction section Frame feed (Waiting position → Surplus urine suction position)
4: Introduction section Frame feed (Surplus urine suction position → Waiting position)
5: Transport section Waiting position
6: Transport section Frame feed (normal rotation 10 ms)
7: Transport section Frame feed (normal rotation 100 ms)
8: Transport section Frame feed (reverse rotation 100 ms)
9: Photometric section Initialization (move to white board position and then to waiting position)
Upon pressing STOP key, the unit ends the test and returns back to Item No. input screen.
3-43
5-33 Item No. 410: Test operation of system (total, continuous)
Use this test to verify continuous operation of the system. The unit operates in two modes: "Introduction section +
Transport section + Photometric section" and "Introduction section + Transport section". The number of
operations is displayed. The number of operations is printed every 10 operations.
(2) Specify the operation mode by using "0" or "1" key.
No. 410 0-1

Operation mode
0: Introduction section + Transport section + Photometric section
1: Introduction section + Transport section
2: Photometric section only
Upon pressing STOP key, the unit ends the test and returns to the item No. input screen.
(3) After entering operation mode, the unit starts continuous operation of system and displays the number of
operations.
No. 400 103890

Upon pressing STOP key, the unit ends operation test and returns to the item No. input screen.
3-44
5-34 Item No. 420: Adjust system (photometric section light intensity)
Use this function to adjust light intensity of photometric section. The unit continuously samples the photometric
section on white board and displays A/D counts of every wavelengths and A/D counts of dark in sequence. Pulse
drive the photometric section with key.
(Since the photometric section can operate freely, it may hit associated parts, causing damage to them.)
Press ENTER key to accept the input and
No. 420 move photometric section to the white
board.
(2) A/D counts are displayed. These counts can be toggled in the order shown below by pressing "-" key.
-430- 2500 A/D count of 430 nm
-565- 2600 A/D count of 565 nm
-635- 2700 A/D count of 635 nm
-760- 2800 A/D count of 760 nm
-000- 200 A/D count of dark
The photometric section operates as follows according to the key pressed.

7: Moves left by 100 pulses (toward waiting position).
4: Moves left by 10 pulses.
1: Moves left by 1 pulse.
9: Moves right by 100 pulses.
6: Moves right by 10 pulses.
3: Moves right by 1 pulse.
0: Moves to initialization position.
STOP key: The unit ends adjusting operation and returns back to the item No. input screen.
If the photometric section fails to operate, the following trouble screen will appear.
T131
Description of the trouble code.
T131: Photometric section is malfunctioning.
3-45
5-35 Item No. 421: Check levelness
Determine the levelness on photometric section by using levelness checking device.
(2) After initialization process, install the levelness checking tool on the photometric section and press
START key.
(3) Test strip is measured at photometric section.
No. 421
(5) At the end of measurement, measured data will be printed.
Printed figures are values with respect to center point. (Data are taken at 9 mm interval.)
430 nm 565 nm 635 nm 760 nm

99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1 → [1]
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 [6] Center point
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1
99.5 99.3 99.3 99.1 → [11]
– – – – – – – – – – –
Center point
Photometric section
[1] x x x x x x[6] x x x x x x [11]
25 mm Checking tool
70 mm
115 mm
Photometric table
3-46
5-36 Item No. 430: Adjust waiting position of introduction lever
Adjust the waiting position of the introduction lever. Input the control value with keys "1" through "9".
Determine appropriate waiting position by driving the introduction lever with START key and "0" key, and then
press ENTER key.
(CAUTION: This option allows the introduction lever to move without control, causing to hit surrounding
parts and damage them.)
(2) The introduction lever moves to the waiting position and the current control value is displayed.
Adjust the control value (0-100) with keys "1" through "9" and move the lever to controlled position with
START key.
No. 430 100

Input keys and introduction lever movement
7: Changes control value by 50 ms frontward (toward waiting side).
4: Changes control value by 10 ms frontward.
9: Changes control value by 50 ms rearward.
0: Returns the lever to the original waiting position.
START key: Moves the lever to the current control position.
ENTER key: Accepts the current control value and returns to the item No. input screen.
STOP key: Ends the adjustment operation and the item No. input screen.
3-47
5-37 Item No. 440: Adjust surplus urine suction position of introduction lever
This option is to adjust surplus urine suction position of the introduction lever. Input the control value with keys
"1" through "9". Determine appropriate surplus urine suction position by driving the introduction lever with
START key and "0" key, and then press ENTER key to accept the current value.
(CAUTION: This option allows the introduction lever to move without control, causing to hit surrounding
parts and damage them.)
(2) The introduction lever moves to the surplus urine suction position and the current control value is
displayed.
Adjust the control value (0-100) with keys "1" through "9" and move the lever to controlled position with
START key.
Enter the number of item to be operated.
No. 430 1145 50

[1] [2]
[1]: Time (ms) necessary to move from waiting position to surplus urine suction position.
[2]: Time delay (ms) from detection of the surplus urine suction position PI to stop.
Input keys and introduction lever movement
7: Changes control value by 50 ms frontward (toward waiting side).
0: Returns the lever to the original waiting position.
3-48
5-38 Item No. 450: Adjust transport lever waiting position
Adjust the waiting position of the transport lever. Input the control value with keys, 1, 4, 7, 3, 6 and 9.
Determine appropriate waiting position by driving the transport lever with START key, and then press ENTER
key.
(CAUTION: This option allows the transport lever to move uncontrolled, causing damage.)
(2) The transport lever moves to the waiting position and the current control value is displayed.
Adjust the control value (0-100) with keys 1, 4, 7, 3, 6 and 9, and move the lever to controlled position
with START key.
Enter the number of item to be operated.
No. 450 0 10
[2] [1]
[1]: Time delay (ms) from detection of transport PI to stop.

[2]: Status of transport PI
Input keys and transport lever movement
7: Changes control value by 10 ms in normal direction (test strip transport direction).
9: Changes control value by 10 ms in reverse direction (opposite to test strip transport direction).
3-49
5-39 Item No. 460: Adjust photometric section left side waiting position
Adjust the left side waiting position of the photometric section. While pulse-driving the photometric section with
key, determine appropriate waiting position and press ENTER key to set the number of control pulses.
(Since the photometric section can operate freely, it may hit associated parts, causing damage to them.)
(2) Type the number of item to be operated.
No. 460 0-9

The photometric section operates as follows according to the key pressed.
7: Moves frontward (left side) by 100 pulses.
4: Moves frontward by 10 pulses.
1: Moves frontward by 1 pulse.
9: Moves rearward (right side) by 100 pulses.
6: Moves rearward by 10 pulses.
3: Moves rearward by 1 pulse.
START key: Moves left side waiting position determined by input value.
ENTER key: Unit accepts the current pulses and returns to the item No. input screen.
STOP key: The unit ends adjusting operation and returns back to the item No. input screen.
3-50
5-40 Item No. 470: Adjust black mark detection pulse (mark at right)
The unit measures Aution Sticks and displays number of control pulses of photometric section.
* When item No. 004: Test strip placement direction is "1 (mark at left)" or "2 (mark at right)", change
this setting to "0" and then start adjustment.
* Be sure to use test strip having 4 mm wide black mark or white check sample.
If these adjustments are not done, pulse number cannot be set correctly.
(2) Set Aution Sticks on the measurement area and press START key.
(3) The test strip is measured at photometric section.
No. 470
(4) The number of control pulses at photometric section will be displayed.
No. 470 3348 1468

No. of right drive pulses No. of left drive pulses
The unit goes to EEPROM writing screen upon pressing ENTER key.
The unit returns back to the item No. input screen upon pressing STOP key.
The unit starts photometry again upon pressing START key.
If photometric operation fails, the following trouble screen may appear.
T137 Ent
The trouble code identifies the problem as shown below:
T130: photometric section fails during initialization
T131: photometric section fails to operate
T132: A/D value overflows (quantity of reflected light is abnormal)
T133: range over (quantity of reflected light is too large)
T134: range under (quantity of reflected light is too small)
T135: dark over (quantity of stray light is large)
T137: test strip without black mark
T122, T138: no test strip
For other codes, refer to "Error and trouble specification".
3-51
5-41 Item No. 471: Adjust black mark detection pulse (mark at left)
The unit measures Aution Sticks and displays number of control pulses of photometric section.
* When item No. 004: Test strip placement direction is "1 (mark at left)" or "2 (mark at right)", change
this setting to "0" and then start adjustment.
* Be sure to use test strip having 4 mm wide black mark or white check sample. Set MEAS mode test strip
to 4 mm wide mark (10 EA).
If these adjustments are not done, pulse settings will be indicated as "----".
(2) Set Aution Sticks on the introduction section and press START key.
(3) The test strip is measured at photometric section.
No. 471
(4) The number of control pulses at photometric section will be displayed.
No. 470 1468 3348

No. of right drive pulses No. of left drive pulses
The unit goes to EEPROM writing screen upon pressing ENTER key.
The unit returns back to the item No. input screen upon pressing STOP key.
The unit starts photometry again upon pressing START key.
T137 Ent
T122, T138: no test strip
3-52
5-42 Item No. 480: Adjust color tone (calculate C/M, Y/M, C/r correction value)
Measure 5 Aution Sticks dipped in water. Based on the results, C/M, Y/M, C/r correction value (zero point
correction) will be calculated.
* Be sure to use test strip set in MEAS mode.
(2) Press START key and set Aution Sticks to the introduction section in timing with buzzer.
(3) Test strip is transported and measured at photometric section.

Test strips used for adjustment
No. 480 1 0 10EA
No. of test strips No. of measurements
T137 Ent
T138: no test strip
(4) At the end of photometric process (5 strips), EEPROM write screen will appear.
If the modified settings will be used at the next power-up, press 1 key to save on EEPROM. If the current
modification is for a temporary use, press 0 key. The modification will be reflected on the printed
parameters but not be saved on EEPROM once power is shut down. Pressing STOP key cancels all
modifications.
EEP 0-1
3-53
5-43 Item No. 490: Set 430 nm wavelength correction (not used)
Set 430 nm wavelength correction value. Practical setting method is not developed.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", enter 430 nm wavelength correction value.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit acknowledges the input value and goes to input screen (2) of 500 nm
wavelength correction.
3-54

3-55
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", enter photometric section initial position correction value.
5-48 Item No. 500: Display incoming strip detection level

This function indicates the current incoming test strip detection voltage (A/D count).
(2) The current incoming test strip detection voltage (A/D count) is displayed.
No. 500 1200

Upon pressing STOP key, the unit clears the reading and returns to the item No. input screen.
5-49 Item No. 510: Display temperature

Continuously displays current temperature.
(2) The screen continuously displays current temperature.
No. 510 27.3

Upon pressing STOP key, the unit clears the reading and returns to the item No. input screen.
3-56
5-50 Item No. 520: Input introduction lever waiting position (time: ms)
Input the time for adjusting position where the introduction lever detects PI and stops. Using keys "1" through "9",
input control value and press ENTER key.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input introduction section waiting position control value and press ENTER
key.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input value and moves to input screen (2) of item No.
521.
5-51 Item No. 521: Input surplus urine suction position of introduction lever (time: ms)
Input the time for adjusting position where the introduction lever detects PI and stops. Using keys "1" through "9",
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input introduction section waiting position control value and press ENTER
key.
522.
Note 1)
3-57
5-52 Item No. 522: Input transport lever waiting position (time: ms)
Input the time for adjusting position where the transport lever detects PI and stops. Using keys "1" through "9",
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input introduction section waiting position control value.
523.
Note 1)
5-53 Item No. 523: Input photometric section left waiting position pulse
Set the number of pulses for photometric section left waiting position in the 001 to 999.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input the No. of drive pulses for photometric section left waiting position.
524.
Note 1)
3-58
5-54 Item No. 524: Set drive pulse for right drive photometric section 1 (mark at right)
Set the number of drive pulses for photometric section. Input range is 0001 to 9999.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input the No. of drive pulses for photometric section.
525.
Note 1)
5-55 Item No. 525: Set drive pulse for left drive photometric section 1 (mark at right)
526.
Note 1)
3-59
5-56 Item No. 526: Set drive pulse for right drive photometric section 2 (mark at left)
527.
Note 1)
5-57 Item No. 527: Set drive pulse for left drive photometric section 2 (mark at left)
528.
Note 1)
3-60
5-58 Item No. 528: Set color tone (C/M correction)
Color tone setting is stored on EEPROM. This is usually a factory setting made upon shipping to adjust 0 point by
measuring water.
This change in color tone setting may not be stored on EEPROM.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input C/M correction.
No. 528 1.001 Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input value and moves to the input screen (2) of the item
No. 529.
Note 1)
5-59 Item No. 529: Set color tone (Y/M correction)
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input Y/M correction.
No. 530.
Note 1)
3-61
5-60 Item No. 530: Set color tone (C/r correction)
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input C/r correction.
No. 531. If STOP key is pressed, the unit ignores the input value and returns back to the item No. input
screen. Note 1)
5-61 Item No. 531: Set DIP detect threshold
Set with/without DIP detect threshold. Input range is 000 to 999 (%).
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input threshold of reflectance.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input value and moves to the EEPROM write
confirmation screen.
Note 1)
3-62
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-63
5-62 Item No. 550: Change analytical curve information (threshold, abnormal mark rank)
Among information on test strip, threshold of reflectance and abnormal mark rank can be set. Change in threshold
may be left unsaved to EEPROM.
(Threshold contained in Chinese version ROM cannot be changed.) *V1.13C
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input the items of test strip to be changed.
Input values and corresponding test strip items are as shown below.
Item number vs item name
Item number Item name Item number Item name Item number Item name
01 GLU 07 PH 13 A/C
02 PRO 08 BLD 14 LPR
03 KET 09 LEU 15 LP/C
04 BIL 10 S.G. 16 P/C
05 URO 11 ALB
06 NIT 12 CRE
Upon pressing STOP key, the unit returns back to the item No. input screen.
If an item not registered as test item is selected, the unit will not go to the next value change input screen.
(3) Using "-" key, display the rank to be changed and set the threshold of that rank in terms of reflectance (in
unit of 0.1%). (Concentration is expressed as upper 4-digit value.)
Upon pressing START key, a symbol [ ] is displayed. Ranks below this rank will be given abnormal
mark. (Specific gravity cannot be set.)
01 30 075.1 Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
Rank number Concentration Reflectance
01 30 075.1 START key indicates abnormal rank mark.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit sets the input value and returns back to (2) test strip item input.
Upon pressing STOP key, the unit returns back to the item No. input screen. *See Note 1.
3-64
undone.
EEP 0-1
To perform measurement by using modified standard analytical curve, print the changed test strip
items by using "Print parameter". (To restore initialized analytical curve)
During reprinting and retransmission, backed up data will result in changed test strip item
information when output.
When "Change analytical curve" is selected again in the item No. input screen, the test strip item
information will be read from EEPROM. If the last process ended with "Not save in EEPROM",
the information is not the desired one.
3-65
5-63 Item No. 560: Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, PRO reference
Determine PRO reference used to judge DILUTE by P/C ratio. Input range is 000 to 999.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input the reference.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input value and moves to the input screen of the item No.
561.
5-64 Item No. 561: Set P/C ratio, DILUTE reference, CRE reference
Determine CRE reference used to judge DILUTE by P/C ratio. Input range is 000 to 999.
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input the reference.
Note 1)
3-66
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-67
5-65 Item No. 600: Aution Net (entering information on analytical curve through PC)
Feed information on test strip, test strip item and color tone to the PC that will send the information to the unit.
The information may not be stored in EEPROM.
(This function is not contained in Chinese version ROM.) *V1.13C
(2) A screen will appear to indicate that communication is being processed. Send the settings from the PC.
Pressing STOP key cancels the process.
-------------
(3) When the PC ends the transmission of the information, EEPROM write confirmation screen will appear.
If the modified settings are to be used at the next power-up, press "1" key to save the settings on
EEPROM. If the modified settings are for temporary use and not required to be saved on EEPROM, press
"0" key. Pressing STOP key cancels all inputs.
EEP 0-1
(4) While writing to EEPROM, write screen appears that will be replaced by the item No. input screen as
writing process finishes.
No. 600
Stored
(CAUTION): When using this feature to modify the standard analytical curve before starting measurement,
print the changed items (test strip information, test strip item information) by using "Print
parameter" option. Save the printed document. This is to restore the modified analytical curve
in case the test strip information and test strip item information are initialized.
During reprinting and retransmission, backed up data will result in changed test strip
information and test strip item information when output. (Color tone results are not irrelevant.)
When process finished with "Not save to EEPROM", do not use other setting functions.
If "Aution Net" is selected later on the item No. input screen, test strip information, test strip
item information, color tone information and system parameters will be read from EEPROM. If
"Not save to EEPROM" was chosen at the end of the preceding process, undesired information
will be supplied.
3-68
5-66 Item No. 610: Set test strip to be selected
Determine the test strip that is to be displayed as a candidate when selecting the test strip for measurement.
(This function is not contained in Chinese version ROM.) *V1.13C
(2) The name of test strip and current setting (1: display as an option, 0: not display as an option) will be
displayed. When changing the current setting, press "0" or "1" key as appropriate.
No. 610 10EA 1 Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
ENTER key toggles among test strips.
No. 610 9EA 0
No. 610 8EA 0
If only 10EA and 4EA are to be used, set as follows:
No. 610 10EA 1 No. 610 5EA 0 No. 610 7UA 0
No. 610 9EA 0 No. 610 4EA 1 No. 610 7Ub 0
No. 610 8EA 0 No. 610 9Ub 0 No. 610 5UA 0
No. 610 7EA 0 No. 610 8UA 0 No. 610 5Ub 0
No. 610 6EA 0 No. 610 8Ub 0 No. 610 4UA 0
(3) At the end of settings, EEPROM write confirmation screen will appear.
To acknowledge these settings, press "1" key. Remember that the backup data will be erased.
To cancel the inputs, press "0" key.
EEP 0-1
(4) Following "1" or "0" key operation, the screen will change to the item No. input screen.
3-69
(5) Set test strip for each measurement mode. On the item No. input screen, press "2" key.
(6) Set test strip for each measurement mode. On the input screen, press "2" key.
(7) Select test strip for normal measurement mode with "-" key.
MEAS
No. 002 10EA Press ENTER key to acknowledge the input.
(8) Select test strip for STAT mode with "-" key.
STAT
(9) Select test strip for control mode with "-" key.
CONT
3-70
5-67 Item No. 700: Set device serial number

＜In service mode, a setup is impossible. Item No. 700～Item No. 712＞
Set the serial number of the device in 8 digits (00000000-99999999).
(2) With keys "0" to "9", input the serial number of device.
Acknowledge the input value by pressing ENTER key. The screen will change to the item No. 701 input
screen.
Note 1)
5-68 Item No. 701: Settings specific to place of destination

Set as Arkray compatible sales subsidiary or not. Depending on this setting, set black mark, position mark printed
on test strip.
(2) Using "0" or "1" key, input the destination number.
0: Arkray compatible sales subsidiary

1: Arkray non-compatible sales subsidiary
Note 1)
Note 1)
When changing this setting, be sure to select analytical curve in the function item No. 120.
3-71
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-72
5-69 Item No. 710: Set upper limit of reflectance
Set the reflectance upper limit. Input range is 000 to 999 (%).
(2) Using keys "0" through "9", input the reflectance higher threshold.
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input value and goes to the item No. 711: Print sample
error mark input screen (2).
5-70 Item No. 711: Print sample error mark
Select whether the sample error mark is to be printed on a sample: print (ON) or not print (OFF).
(2) Using key "1" or "0", turn ON or OFF error mark printing function.
0: "OFF (not print)"

1: "ON (print)"
Upon pressing ENTER key, the unit accepts the input and goes to the item No. 712 input screen (2).
Note 1)
3-73
5-71 Item No. 712: Set abnormal color detection
Select whether the abnormal color detection is to be enabled: detect (ON) or not detect (OFF).
(2) Using key "1" or "0", turn ON or OFF abnormal color detection feature.
0: "OFF (not detect)"

1: "ON (detect)"
Note 1)
Note 1)
undone.
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
3-74
5-72 Item No. 900: Clear memory
Clears results of measurement contained in the backup RAM.
(2) Erasure confirmation screen will appear. To erase contents, press "1" key. If not, press "0" key.
No. 900 0-1

"0" key: Retain the measurement result and return to the item No. input screen.
"1" key: Erase the measurement result and perform judgment (ON).
5-73 Item No. 990: Initialize EEPROM
This option initializes the information stored in EEPROM back to the default (factory settings). Stored contents
include system settings (service setting), user settings, test strip information, test strip item information and color
tone information.
These contents can be independently or totally initialized.
(2) Using keys "0" through "8", select the item(s) to be printed.

1: Service settings or system settings
2: User settings
6: Factory setting
7: Ethernet inspection setup
8: Serial communication inspection setup
0: Items 1 to 5 listed above.
Upon pressing STOP key, the unit will return to the item No. input screen without performing
initialization.
3-75
(3) Initialization confirmation screen will appear. To start initialization, press "1" key.
EEP 0-1
If "0" key is pressed, the unit will return to the item No. input screen without performing initialization.
(4) Initialization confirmation screen will appear. To start initialization, press "2" key.
EEP 0-2
At the end of initialization process, the unit returns to the item No. input screen.
If "0" key is pressed, the unit will return to the item No. input screen without performing initialization.
(CAUTION): When "0: All", "3: Test strip information", "4: Test strip item information" or "6: Factory
setting" is initialized, the backup data is cleared.
Initialization process on "Test strip information" or "Test strip item information" deletes all the
test strip information or test strip item information. If threshold or printing sequence has been
changed, make sure that contents to be erased by initialization process can be restored (for
example, print the test strip item information).
Also note that initialization of "Test strip information" or "Test strip item information" makes
measurement impossible. Be sure to perform "Select analytical curve".
Never turn off power during initialization.
3-76
6 Item No. 142: The operation method at the time of AJ system selection.
6-1 Select the measurement mode
1) On the Ready screen, press ID
The Meas Type screen is displayed.
The Meas icon flashes.
MEAS. STAT.
ID#
2) Select the measurement mode

Press the Right or Left key to display the mode.
Press ENTER.
The Normal measurement is entered, and the ID# Input screen is displayed.
6-2 Enter a Patient ID No.

1) Enter a Patient ID
MEAS. MEAS.
No. 01 ID# 12345
Enter a Patient ID by using the numeric keys. A maximum of 13 digits including hyphen can be entered.
When you are not entering Patient ID for every sample, press the ENTER key to skip the unnecessary sample.
2) Press ENTER.
The number is stored in memory.
Repeat the same procedure for the following Patient IDs.
When using the Hand-held Bar-code Reader.

On the the ID# Input screen, scan the barcode one by one.
To skip scanning, press ENTER.
When you scan it too fast, the alarm will sound.
6-3 After entering all the Patient ID Nos.

Press STOP.
The ID# Save screen is displayed.
MEAS. STAT.
ID# 1-0
Press 1.
The screen returns to the Standby.
To cancel the entering, press 0. The screen returns to the Standby.
To cancel a patient ID number , press and hold ID for about 2 seconds.
3-77
5-18 Item No. 144: Auto-start check setting

You can select between the mode in which the auto-start sensor and strip introduction sensor are both
used, or the mode in which only the strip introduction sensor is used.
At time of shipment the device is set as follows: １(ON: both auto-start sensor, strip introduction
sensor.)
In the event that the auto-start sensor detects the strip and the strip introduction sensor does not, E009
will occur.
(1) Type 1, 4, 4 on the item number input screen.
No. 144 Press ENTER key to confirm.
Press the STOP key to leave Service Mode.
(2) Press 0 and 1 keys to select qualitative values as output setting values.
No. 144 1 Press ENTER key to confirm.
0 (OFF): Detects strip using only the strip introduction sensor.

1 (ON): Detects strip using both the auto-start sensor and strip introduction sensor.
Press the ENTER key, to set input values and go to the item No.145 Input screen (2)
Press the STOP key to clear input values and return to item No. Input screen. Note 1)
5-19 Item No. 145: Continous measurement mode settings

The user can select between the 2 following modes. In the first mode, if the Introduction mode (User
setting No.005）is set on the continuous measurement mode setting, even if the test strip introduction
sensor does not detect the test strip, photometric measurement will still occur and check whether a test
strip is present. In the second mode, photometric measurement will only occur if a test strip is detected
by the strip introduction sensor.
At time of shipment from the factory, the device is set as 0 (STRIP: photometric measurement only
occurs if the test strip introduction sensor detects a test strip.)
(1) Type 1, 4, 5 on the Item No. input screen.
Press STOP key to exit Service Mode.
0 (STRIP): Photometric measurement only when test strip is detected by test strip
introduction sensor.
1 (ALL): Always perform photometric measurement.
Press ENTER key to set inputted values and go to item No. 146 Input screen (2).
Press STOP key to clear inputted values and return to item No. Input screen. (Note1)
3-78
5-20 Item No. 146: Operation setting at time of test strip error (T-137, T-138)
2 options are available to the user. In the first mode option, when a test strip error (T-137, T-138),
occurs, measurement will be interrupted. In the second mode option, when an error occurs, the
introduction lever and timing buzzer will stop but if a test strip has already been introduced into the
device, measurement shall continue.
At time of shipping from the factory, the device is set as: 0 (STOP: Interrupt measurement) Rev. A
Press STOP key to exit Service Mode
0 (STOP): Interrupt photometric measurement

1 (MEAS): Stops introduction lever operation and timing buzzer and continues
photometric measurement.
Press ENTER key to set inputted values and return to item No. Input screen. (Note 1)
Press STOP key to clear inputted values and return to item No. Input screen. (Note 1)
5-21 Item No. 147: Eliminate effect of creatinine on protein

A function to eliminate the effect of creatinine on protein can be selected ON or OFF. It is set as OFF at
time of shipment from the factory.

Press STOP key to exit Service Mode
(2) Press 0 and 1 keys to switch the function (elimination of creatinine effect on protein) ON and OFF.
0: OFF
1: ON
Press ENTER key to set inputted values and return to Item No. input screen. (Note 1)
Press STOP key to clear inputted values and return to Item No. input screen. (Note 1)
Note 1)
When you have completed all of the settings and return to the Item No. screen,the EEPROM rewrite screen
shall appear. If you want the settings you have selected to be set after you next restart the device, press the 1
key (save in Eeprom.) If it is only a temporary change, and you want to continue with the previous settings
after the next time you restart the device, press the 0 key.(Do not save in Eeprom). Press stop key to clear
previously inputted information.
Rev. A
3-79
EEP 0-1
Saving on EEPROM
No. XXX
Stored
Rev. A
3-80
Chapter 4 Electrical Circuit Diagrams
１ Circuit Diagrams
4-1
Chapter 5 Standard Inspection

1. Test Items
1)Test Items ·································································································································· 2
2. Test Methods and Standards

1) Screw Lock ······························································································································ 3
2) Lead Wire, Connector ············································································································· 3
3) Revised Items of Drawings, Work Standard, and between lots ··············································· 3
4) Power Switch ·························································································································· 3
5) Maintenance Cover ················································································································· 4
6) Waste Box ······························································································································· 4
7) Detaching and reattaching the suction ports ··········································································· 4
8) Surplus urine suction position of the introduction arm ····························································· 4
9) Check test strips feeding ········································································································· 5
10) Detaching and reattaching the introduction arm, test strip tray, test strip feed tray
and feed lever ······················································································································· 5
11) Check at Power ON ··············································································································· 5
12) Operator Keys ······················································································································· 5
13) Display ·································································································································· 5
14) Paper Detection ····················································································································· 5
15) Printing ·································································································································· 5
16) External Output (RS-232C) ··································································································· 6
17) External Output (Ethernet) ···································································································· 6
18) Bar-code ································································································································ 6
19) Check Strip ···························································································································· 7
20) Color Check Strip ·················································································································· 7
21) Exterior ·································································································································· 7
22) Check specific to place of destination ··················································································· 7
23) Accessories ··························································································································· 7
24) Check labeling ······················································································································· 7
25) Check light quantity of optical system ··················································································· 7
26) Check temperature output ····································································································· 7
27) Power source input ················································································································ 7
28) Measure the exterior ············································································································· 7
5-1
Chapter 5 Standard Inspection AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
1. Test Items
№ 検査分類照合№ Test Items

1 Confirmation 1) Screw Lock
Tests
2) Lead Wire, Connector
3) Revised Items of Drawings, Work
Standard, and between lots
2 Mechanical 4) Power Switch
Tests
5) Maintenance Cover
6) Waste Box
7) Detaching and reattaching the suction
ports
8) Surplus urine suction position of the
introduction arm
9) Check test strips feeding
10) Detaching and reattaching the
introduction arm, test strip tray, test
strip feed tray and feed lever
3 Functional 11) Check at Power ON
Tests
12) Operator Keys
13) Display
14) Paper Detection

15) Printing
16) External Output (RS232C)
17) External Output (Ethernet)
18) Bar-code
4 Performance 19) Check Strip
Test 20) Color Check Strip
5 Others 21) Exterior

22) Check specific to place of destination
23) Accessories
24) Check labeling
25) Check light quantity of optical system
26) Check temperature output
27) Power source input
28) Measure the exterior
5-2
2. Test Methods and Standard

1. Confirmation Tests
1) Screw Lock
Check each screws and make sure every screw is tightly screwed.
[Standard]
Every screw is tightly screwed.
2) Lead Wire, Connector

Check the wiring condition of lead wires moving connectors with hands. Check the connector
numbers.
[Standard]
Lead wires should be wired in order without no crossing. Connectors should be firmly
attached. Connector numbers should be correct.
3) Revision of Drawings, Work Standards, between lots

Check whether revision of the drawings, work standards, and between lots are correctly
executed or not.
[Standard]
All revisions should be correctly followed.
2. Mechanical Check
4) Power switch
Check the attachment condition of Power Switch, and ON/OFF.
[Standard]
The Power Switch should be attached firmly without looseness or stop. The switch correctly
correspond to ON/OFF.
5) Maintenance cover
Remove and attach the Maintenance Cover for several times and check the condition.
[Standard]
The Maintenance Cover should be removed and attached easily.
6) Waste Box
Remove the Waste Box several times and check the condition.
[Standard]
The Waste Box should smoothly be removed and inserted. No abnormal sound should be
heard.
7) Detaching and reattaching the suction ports
Remove and attach the suction ports for several times and check the condition.
[Standard]
The suction ports should be removed and attached easily.
5-3
8) Surplus urine suction position of the introduction arm

Check the introduction arm position using a Test Strip on the Service Mode.
(Operation on the Service Mode: On the Ready Screen, enter -4020- , 440 , Ent .
To cancel, press the STOP key.
[Standard]
After entering 440. a Test Strip should be pressed to the suction ports.
Note: The Test Strips stands it still in the position of a surplus urine suction part.
9) Check test strips feeding

Place 50 Test Strips on the Test Strip Tray and check the mechanical condition.
[Standard]
The Test Strips should be carried without abnormal sound, stop or trouble.
※Inspection time takes 1 measurement / 7 second x 50 times = 350 seconds.
10) Detaching and reattaching the introduction arm, test strip tray, test strip feed tray and feed
lever.
Remove and attach the introduction arm, test strip tray, test strip feed tray and feed
lever for several times and check the condition.
[Standard]
The introduction arm, test strip tray, test strip feed tray and feed lever should be removed
and attached easily.
3. Functional Tests
11) Check at Power ON
Check the operation and contents of the display.
[Standard]
The display and operation should be as follows:
At power ON→Full screen lighting
●Name of the analyzer, version No. are displayed for 2 seconds, then Self Check starts.
At Self Check→ AE-4020 01.00
●The analyzer checks the ROM and back up RAM, then initializing starts.
Initializing(Subtraction display)→ 21→20→……
●After initializing, the display goes to the Ready screen.
Ready screen(MEAS. Icon lighting, Measurement number/Test strips
classification display)→No,0001 10EA
(Initializing all functions - disposal of Test Strips)
5-4
12) Operator Keys

Perform the following key operations below and check the contents of the display and alarm.
From the Ready screen
1. Press MENU , →Key×2 , ENTER , Date , ENTER , Time , ENTER , STOP
2. FEED
[Standard]
An alarm should sound at every key press and the display shows what is entered.
The paper should be fed at pressing the FEED key.
13) Display
Check each letter of the display.
※It checks at the time of the all-points light display at the time of a power supply ON.
[Standard]
The letter should be clear without no missing part of dotted letter.
14) Paper Detection

Without thermal recording paper, check if the analyzer detects an error correctly.
[Standard]
The icon "E004 Ent" of a slip of paper blinks, and BUSA sounds. Cancel by ENTER.
15) Printing
Check the printing condition.
MENU , →Key×5 , 1 , ENTER
To cancel, press the STOP key.
[Standard]
Printing should be neatly done for every letter. Check if there is any missing part.
16) External Output (RS-232C)

An external output is set up and an external output implement (exclusive software jig) is connected
to an external output terminal.
Next, the data by which the memory is carried out is broadcast again.
（External output setup：）MENU→(→Key×5)→No,013→1(ON)→ENTER。
[Standard]
The measurement data of a main part and the taken-in data of a implement
(exclusive software jig) be in agreement.
5-5
17) External Output (Ethernet)

An external output is set up and an external output implement (exclusive software jig) is
connected to an external output terminal.
Next, the data by which the memory is carried out is broadcast again.
（External output setup：）MENU→(→Key×5)→No,013→1(ON)→ENTER）
（Ethernet setup：①｢-4020-｣→No,300→1(Ethernet) →ENTER
②｢-4020-｣→No,321(IP address)→192→ENTER→168→ENTER→225→ENTER→100→ENTER
③｢-4020-｣→No,322(Sub Net ask)→255→ENTER→255→ENTER→225→ENTER→0→ENTER
④｢-4020-｣→No,323(Default Gateway)→192→ENTER→168→ENTER→225→ENTER→1→
→ENTER
[Standard]
The measurement data of a main part and the taken-in data of a implement
(exclusive software jig) be in agreement.
18) Bar-code
Connect the Hand-held Bar-code Reader (BL-N60VN : KEYENCE) and check the reading
condition.
[Standard]
Letter and number should be correctly read and displayed.
4. Performance Test
19) Check Strip
Equipment is made into check sample mode.
Ａ check sample is measured each N=1 every right and every left.
(Choose by the hyphen key.)
[Standard]
All results of wavelengths should fall within the standard range.
20) Color Check Strip

①It is made the reflectance(%) mode of auto measurement, and the color paper for
a wavelength check is measured N= 10 times every right.
(Reflectance setup：MENU→(→Key×5→No,003→1(reflectance(%))→ENTER）
(Temperature compensation release：It sets up out of measurement standby as follows.
｢-4020-｣→No,133→0(Invalid) →ENTER）
（Specific gravity compensation release：It sets up out of measurement standby as follows.
②It is made the reflectance(%) mode of auto measurement, and the color paper for
a wavelength check is measured N= 10 times every left.
(Reflectance setup：MENU→(→Key×5→No,003→1(reflectance(%))→ENTER）
(Temperature compensation release：It sets up out of measurement standby as follows.
5-6
（Specific gravity compensation release：It sets up out of measurement standby as follow.
[Standard]
Pro and PH: Fiducial %→ +2.5% and -4.5% of within the limits as a result of measurement.
The other item is ±3% of fiducial %.
Moreover, standard deviation (S. D) is less than 0.5% of thing.
5-7
5. Others
21) Exterior
Check any flaw of deteriorating the product value such as scratch, dirt or deformation.
[Standard]
No flaw that may deteriorate product value should be found.
22) Check specific to place of destination

Each specification of a lot is checked.
[Standard]
Each specification is set up as a work standard document.
（"Eeprom Init." is performed before each specification setup.：「-4020-」→N0,990→1→Enter
→1、「-4020-」→N0,990→2→Enter→1） Release is "STOP " Key.）
23) Accessories
Check any flaw of deteriorating the product value such as scratch, dirt or deformation on all
accessories. Check the specifications and quantity of accessories are the same as
described on the drawings.
[Standard]
No flaw that may deteriorate product value should be found. The specifications and quantity
of accessories should be the same as described on the drawings.
24) Labeling
Check all the labelings adhered to the analyzer.
[Standard]
The following items should be permanently printed.
Approval Code
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Product name
Electrical standard
25) Check light quantity of optical system

The light quantity value of each wavelength is checked in a hard static test mode (No, 420).
Wavelength is changed by the "-" key.
[Standard]
２７００±２５０ Count （Each wavelength）
※Room temperature is 25±3℃.
5-8
26) Check temperature output

The directions value of the built-in temperature sensor is checked.
(Method) Reverse mode setup (｢-4020-｣→No,133→0(Invalid)→ENTER)
The difference of the temperature and a temperature inside equipment which are displayed
is checked.
※Temperature in equipment：Near the light measurement part of a transfer table.
[Standard]
Temperature in equipment ±３℃
27) Power source input (An electric safety test)

Power supply voltage is set as the voltage and frequency which were set up for every
specification, and is checked.
(Method) A power supply input examination machine is used and the power supply input under
initialization operation just behind a power supply ON is measured.
[Standard]
It is 45 or less VA.
28) Measure the exterior(Form inspection item)

A scale is used after main part assembly completion, and outside measure is measured.
(At the time of outside measure, it is putting a main part on a flat place.)
[Standard]
Width：２１０±３ｍｍ Height：１６４±３ｍｍ Depth：３２８±３ｍｍ
5-9
Chapter 6 Adjustment Method

Adjustment Method and Parts
Item No. Adjustment Name Parts used Drawing No.

1) − −
Adjusting standby position of
introduction arm
2) 74-12158
Adjusting surplus urine suction position Introduction arm positioning
of introduction arm fixture(jig)
3) Alignment position 74-11794
adjustment fixture(jig)
Alignment width 74-11795
Adjusting test strip alignment adjustment fixture(jig)
Alignment position 74-12398
mechanism
adjustment fixture(jig)2
Block gage （0.5mm）
Block gage （1.0mm）
4) Adjusting standby position of transport - -
lever
5) Adjusting left standby position of - -
photometric section
6) Adjusting light quantity of optical system - -
7) Adjusting black mark detecting pulse Block gage (2mm) -
(black mark placed on right side)
8) Adjusting black mark detecting pulse Block gage (2mm)
(black mark placed on left side)
9) Adjusting automatic start sensor - -
10) Adjusting incoming strip sensing PI - -
11) Checking height of test strip feed table - -
12) Color tone and DIP detection - -
adjustment
(Note)A fixture(jig) drawing should check amendment each time.

Work-standard-document-refer to work details - and others for an end-of-a-book appendix.
6-1
Capter 6 Adjustment Method AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
1) Adjusting standby position of introduction arm.

• Reverse mode: 430 → ENTER
• For details of operation, refer to reverse mode operation manual.
[Standard]
Adjust the time so that the end of auto start detect window and end of the test strip are
located at 0 - 0.5 mm with the test strip placed along the introduction arm.
Auto start detect window
Standard: 0 - 0.5 mm
Test strip
Introduction arm
• Key operation
7 key: Change adjusted value 50 ms frontward (standby position)
4 key: Change adjusted value 10 ms frontward
9 key: Change adjusted value 50 ms backward
0 key: Move back to the previous standby position
START key: Move to the currently adjusted position
ENTER key: Accept the currently adjusted value and return back to the item number input
screen.
STOP key: Terminate adjustment and return back to the item number input screen without
storing the value.
6-2
2) Adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm.

Test strip is brought to the suction ports by the introduction arm through the test strip inlet. By pressing
the test strip against the suction plate, excessive urine is bled out. Adjust the position of the
introduction arm:
Suction ports
(suction plate)
Introduction arm
Not go checking
Introductionarm section
positioning fixture Go checking section
(74-12158)
Place the introduction lever alignment fixture on the suction ports as show below.
Enter reverse mode 440.

The introduction arm moves to push the fixture against suction ports. See the figure below.
6-3
Introduction arm
and pusher
Adjust the distance from the pusher tip to the depth to 4.5 - 4.85 mm.
A pair of pushers have 0.5 mm max. longitudinal deviation at tip. Correct the deviation at
the pusher having deviation at front.
To meet this adjustment requirement, first enter reverse mode.

While moving items shown in the figure on the preceding page, determine the time (ms) where
movement is to be stopped, after PI before and after introduction drive section changes from bright
to dark, to avoid touching the go check section (4.5 mm) but to touch the not go check section
(4.85 mm).
6-4
3) Adjusting test strip alignment mechanism.

＜Operation flow chart＞
Test strip alignment center position< 3)-1>
Verifying test strip transportation status <3)-2>
OK NG
Adjusting alignment arm standby position<3)-3> Readjusting test strip alignment position<3)-4>
End of adjustment Rechecking test strip transportation status<3)-5>
Adjusting standby position of alignment arm <3)-6>
End of adjustment
< 3)-1> Test strip alignment center position.
Prior to this adjustment, position of the introduction arm for surplus urine suction (Reverse mode 440)
shall be completed.In the single unit operation mode 400 (Reverse mode), press No.2 to move the
introduction arm to the surplus urine suction position.
Place the alignment lever adjustment fixture (74-11794) on the 1st port.
Adjust the lateral position of alignment mechanism with setscrew so that the clearance between the tip
of alignment arm rib and the fixture is 0 mm. Tighten the setscrew.
Specification : Clearance between tip of alignment arm rib and the fixture:0 ± 0.25 mm.
(At both left and right side)
Specification : Space between left and right alignment arm ribs: 111 ± 0.5 mm
<3)-2> Verifying test strip transportation status. Test strip 10EA contacts with arm
With alignment arm positioned as specified in ib
3)-1, test strip 10EA shall be placed to touch
the rib of right-hand arm.
6-5
Press No.1 key. While leaving the installed test strip as it is, return the introduction arm and
alignment arm to the standby position. Make sure that the test strip is undisturbed. If disturbed, use
"2" key to move the alignment arm to alignment position to bring the test strip touch the arm.
Under the condition shown in the figure above, press "5" key to move the test strip to a port under
the photometric section.
(Standby position on the transport member is adjusted (Reverse mode 450) and the alignment
spring under the photometric section touches Ctr of transport table.)
Alignment spring
Transport table
Ctr
Clearance between
test strip and guide
Refer to the figure above. Pass a 0.5 mm block gage through the clearance between test strip and
guide. (If the block gage fails to pass, jump to 3)-4.)
Next, reverse the direction of the test strip as shown in the figure below (holding portion of the strip
at left), touching it to left-hand arm.
Test strip 10EA touches the

Press "1" key to return the introduction arm and alignment arm back to the standby position. Press
"5" key to move the test strip under the photometric section.
Clearance between test strip and guide

Refer to the figure above. Pass a 0.5 mm block gage through the clearance between test strip and
guide. If the block gage fails to pass, jump to 3)-4. Otherwise, proceed to 3)-3.
6-6
3)-3. Adjusting alignment arm standby position
In reverse mode 400, use "1" key to move the introduction arm and alignment arm to the standby
position.
Set the alignment lever adjusting fixture(74-11795) to the figure above.

Position the arm stopper so that the clearance between the tip of the alignment arm rib and
fixture is 0 mm.
Specification: Clearance between tip of alignment arm rib and the fixture:
0 ± 0.25 mm. (At both left and right side)
Specification: Distance between ribs of left and right alignment arm at standby position is
121 ± 0.5 mm.
6-7
3)-4. Readjusting test strip alignment position

The clearance between test strip and guide has been verified 0.5 mm or less in 3)-2. If this
clearance specification is exceeded afterward, check the deviation of test strip alignment at 1 port
through the photometric section: if deviated rightward, move the test strip leftward, and vice versa.
right<0.5mm:move the test strip leftward
leftt<0.5mm:move the test strip rightward

Position the arm stopper so that the clearance between the tip of the alignment arm rib and fixture
(74-12398)is 0 mm.
Specification:
Clearance between tip of alignment arm rib and the fixture : 0 ± 0.25 mm.
(At both left and right side)
Specification:
Space between left and right alignment arm ribs: 111 ± 0.5 mm
Distance from the guide of transport member to the top of alignment arm as the test strip is moved
rightward:
Specification: Right side 0.75 ± 0.25 mm
Specification: (Left side 2.25 ± 0.25 mm)
leftward:
Specification: Left side 0.75 ± 0.25 mm
Specification: (Right side 2.25 ± 0.25 mm)
6-8
3)-5. Rechecking test strip transportation status

The procedure is similar to that described in 3)-2 Verifying test strip transportation status.
Specification:
The clearance between L/R guide and the end of coming test strip measured under
the photometric member is 0.5 mm or more.
If the clearance is outside this specification, the bonded pulley and associated parts around it
may have play or looseness, or transport motor is not positively installed or secured.
Check and adjust the following components in the order of number:
[1] Orientation of transport motor

[2] Play of parts surrounding bonded pulley
[3] Bonding of pulley
3)-6. Adjusting standby position of alignment arm

When the transportation system has been proven OK in 3)-5, repeat the procedure described
in 3)-3.
6-9
4) Adjusting standby position of transport lever

• Adjust the standby position to the specified value shown below.
• Verify that the following functional specifications will met after positional adjustment.
[Standard]
• The position equivalent of +7 (ms) from the position where test strip alignment springs (at
left and right) contact the test strip tray.
[Functional requirement]
[1] Test strip alignment springs shall positively contact with the test strip tray.
[2] No test strip shall be caught by the transport lever, bent backward, at test strip waste
stage.
Test strip alignment spring
No gap or clearance
Test strip tray
Test strip
Transport lever
• Key operation
7 key: Change adjusted value 10 ms frontward (test strip feed direction)
9 key: Change adjusted value 10 ms backward (opposite to test strip feed direction)
screen.
storing the value.
6-10
5) Adjusting left standby position of photometric section

• Pulse feed may cause step-out. Be sure to use START key for proper movement to the standby
position. Verify that the standard positioning requirement shown below is met.
[Standard] At all 3 locations in front of the photometric position, 0 - 0.5 mm gap as shown in
the figure below shall be maintained.
Photometric
section
Transport table
0 - 0.5 mm
• Key operation
7 key: Shift adjusted value leftward by 100 pulses
1 key: Shift adjusted value leftward by 1 pulse
9 key: Shift adjusted value rightward by 100 pulses
3 key: Shift adjusted value rightward by 1 pulse
START key: Move to left standby position according to the entered value.
screen.
storing the value.
6-11
6) Adjusting light quantity of optical system

• Adjust the light volume of optical system at an ambient temperature between 22 and 26°C.
• Change measurement wavelength with "−" key and follow the adjusting procedure shown below.
1. Proceed to the following steps with the top cover closed.
• 430 nm:
VR01 (Driver print circuit board): 2700 ± 50 counts
• 565 nm:
• 635 nm:
• 760 nm:
• Dark level: (LCD reading: 000)

Verify that the reading is 500 counts or below.
* Reading of 2700 ± 200 counts at a wavelength after adjustment is allowable when taking into
account initial fluctuation and temperature variation. Reading outside this range requires
readjustment.
VR05 (760 nm) VR03 (565 nm) VR01 (430 nm)
VR04 (635 nm) VR02 (not

used)
6-12
7) Adjusting black mark detecting pulse (black mark placed on right side)
• Prepare a test strip having a black mark at a position within the dimensional tolerance specified
below.
• Perform adjustment with upper cover closed.
4 ± 0.3
83.5 ± 0.3
110 ± 0.5

• Place the prepared test strip having the black mark on its right hand, in the photometric
measurement location.
• Lateral position of the strip shall be as shown in the figure below. (For each block gage)
• Longitudinal position of the strip shall be so determined that its end touches the rib of transport
table.
• Press START key. The detection pulse that scanned the black mark position is displayed on the
LCD.
• Press ENTER key to accept the adjusted value.
• Press "1" key to save the adjusted value.
• For further information on operating method, refer to reverse mode operation manual.
2.0 mm block gage • Longitudinal position: as far as test strip will go

• Lateral position: test strip will touch block gage
6-13
8) Adjusting black mark detecting pulse (black mark placed on left side)
• Place the test strip used in paragraph (4) on the photometric measurement position with the
black mark on its left side.
• Start adjustment with the upper cover closed.
4 ± 0.3
83.5 ± 0.3
110 ± 0.5

• Place the prepared test strip having the black mark on its left hand, in the photometric
measurement location.
• Longitudinal position of the strip shall be so determined that its end touches the rib of transport
table.
• Press START key. The detection pulse that scanned the black mark position is displayed on the
LCD.
• Longitudinal position: as far as test strip will go 2.0 mm block gage

6-14
9) Adjusting automatic start sensor

9)-1. Adjustment
[1] [Check before adjustment] Verify that the window plate and automatic start sensor are
free from stain and flaw.
[2] Move the introduction lever to the introduction position (to the depth: Reverse mode 400 →
ENTER → 2).
[3] Position the test strip No.8 for adjustment (N8 dull attached: see figure below) at the midpoint
of automatic start detection window.
(with ND paper facing down (detection window))
[4] Turn VR07 on the driver print circuit board fully CCW.
[5] Slowly turn VR07 CW until D04 (red LED) turns on.
* CAUTION [1]: Stop turning VR07 CW once the LED turns on. Higher sensitivity causes sensor
error: LED is kept lit.
* CAUTION [2]: Do not touch test strips N8, N5 and N3 with bare hand. ND surface must be free
from dust and flaw: if contaminated or degraded, replace with new one. Or
replace periodically, at least every 6 months. Store test strips at room
temperature in lightproof condition.
D04 (red) VR07 Driver print circuit board
z Place test strip N8 for adjustment at the midpoint.
ND paper attached surface is

facing detection surface
Detection window
6-15
9)-2. Verification 1
[1] Hold the introduction lever at introduction position during the step below.
[2] Wile sliding the test strip N5 for adjustment (with dull N5 attached) from the front of detection
window to the depth of the window, verify that the automatic start sensor displays "0: not
detected" on the screen.
* As noted before, ND paper attached surface is facing detection surface (detection window
side).
NO. 400 1. 0. 0. 1. 0. 0
Automatic start sensor status indication

1: Detected 0: Not detected
[2] Leave the screen display as it is. Position the test strip N3 for adjustment (ND paper: dull N3
attached) 2-3 mm from the front of detection window.
* As noted before, ND paper attached surface is facing detection window.
[3] Put your hand over the detection window until "1: detected" is displayed on the screen.
[4] Put back the hand. Display "1: detected" will change to "0: not detected"
[5] Move the test strip N3 for adjustment (ND paper: dull N3 attached) to a position 2-3 mm from
the rear of detection window; and repeat steps [2] and [3] above. Verify "0: not detected"
message.
2 - 3 mm from the front

face of detection window.
6-16
[1] Place a white base film (test strip for adjustment N8, N5 or N3 with ND attached surface
facing upward) at a position approx. 5 mm from the front. Move the white base film slowly
backward while observing the screen for the message generated by automatic start sensor.
When the message changes from "0: not detected" to "1: detected", verify that the distance
is within 1.5 mm from the end of detection window.
[2] In the same condition as for the above step, move the base film from a position 5 mm behind
the rear slowly toward front. When the message changes from "0: not detected" to "1:
detected", verify that distance is within 1.5 mm from the end of detection window.
z Test strip for adjustment (N8, N5, N3) ND8 (dull ND8 attached)
ND5 (dull ND5 attached)
ND3(dull ND30 attached)
* CAUTION: Excessively increased sensitivity of automatic start detection will keep "ON" state
during measurement, and may generate E008 automatic start sensor error. After
increasing the sensitivity of automatic start sensor, be sure to perform verification 1
(ND5) and verification 2 (ND3).
[Reference] Reflectance (760 nm) of test strips for adjustment measured on AE-4020
[1] ND8: approx. 70%
[3] ND3: approx. 7%
[Remarks] Do not touch test strips for adjustment (N8, N5, N3) with bare hand. Keep ND surface
free from dust and flaw. Save strips at room temperature under lightproof condition.
Replace strips as they become dirty or degraded, or periodically replace (approx.
every half a year).
6-17
10) Adjusting incoming strip sensing PI

10)-1. Preparation
[1] Install the main board cover and close the upper cover.
10)-2. Adjustment
[1] Open the incoming strip sensing PI level check screen. (Reverse mode 500 → ENTER)
[2] Without using test strip, perform the following settings.
* Main board cover installed and upper cover closed
• Control: VR06 (driver PCB)
• Detect level: 100 ± 5 counts
• LED: DO3 (driver PCB) unlit
10)-3. Checking
[1] Place a test strip on the incoming strip sensing PI section and close the upper cover.
[2] Verify the following:
• Detect level: 900 counts or more
• LED: DO3 (driver PCB) is lighting
z Test strip is not present z Test strip is present
Incoming strip sensing

Main board cover Upper cover
Driver print circuit board
VR07 VR06 D03
6-18
11) Checking height of test strip feed table

11)-1. Checking procedure
• Enter: Check sample measurement detail print mode
(Reverse mode: 136 → ENTER → 1)
• In the check sample measurement mode, place base film (white) with black mark on right side
and perform measurement (n=1).
* Base film (white) shall be free from dirt and flaw.
• In the check sample measurement mode, place base film (white) with black mark on left side
and perform measurement (n=1).
• Check that both films meet the following specification.
[Specification] Reflectance at 565 nm, 635 nm and 760 nm shall be equal to or lower than
the % value shown below at all positions for PAD1 through PAD10.
• 100 ± 2.0 %
[Example of printed items]

CHECK
Serial NO.
2005-01-13 09:27
***************************
• 430 (nm)
PAD 1 100.4%
PAD 2 99.8%
PAD 3 99.4%
PAD 4 99.6%
PAD 5 100.0%
PAD 6 99.7%
PAD 7 100.0%
PAD 8 100.0%
PAD 9 99.9%
PAD 10 99.9%
PAD 11 2293
White 2361
Base 1693
• 760 (nm) 100.4%

PAD 1 99.8%
PAD 2 99.4%
PAD 3 99.6%
PAD 4 100.0%
PAD 5 99.7%
PAD 6 100.0%
PAD 7 100.0%
PAD 8 99.9%
PAD 9 99.9%
PAD 10 2293
PAD 11 2361
White 1699
Base
6-19
12) Color tone and DIP detection adjustment

12)-1. Preparation
• Fill paper cup with ion exchanged water.
12)-2. Adjustment
• Press START key.
• Start measurement of the ion exchanged water on required items, 5 times in synchronous with
buzzer sound.
• Measured color tone corrections and DIP detection thresholds and adjustments will be printed.
• Press "1" key to save the corrected values.
12)-3. Verification
• Measure the ion exchanged water 5 times by repeating procedure described in 5.3.
• Verify that the following specifications are met.
• When OK, press 0 key.
[Specification]
• Averaged (Avr) C/M, Y/M, C/r: 0±5
• Variation (R) in C/M, Y/M, C/r: 20 or less
• Averaged (Avr) DIP: 1000 or less

• Variation (R) in DIP: 20 or less
C/M: -7, -5, 0, -1, -4

Y/M: 0, -3, 7, -2, -4
C/r: -6, -4, 4, -1, -4
DIP: 917, 914, 912, 919, 919
C/M Y/M C/r DIP
Average Avr: -3, 0, -2, 916
Variation R: 7, 11, 10, 7
Opt: 983, 1210, 1084, 962
6-20
Appendix
No. Description Appendix._Rev._
1 External Output Specification Appendix.1_Rev.F
2 Print Format Specification Appendix.2_Rev.F
3 Error & Trouble Specification Appendix.3_Rev.E
4 Program initialization Appendix.4_Rev._
5 Rewriting main program （only for a factory.） Appendix.5_Rev._
6 Ethernet setup Appendix.6_Rev._
7 Packing Appendix.7_Rev._
8 Work standard （only for a factory.） Appendix.8_Rev._
9 Maintenance parts Appendix.9_Rev._
Appendix.1 AE-4020 SERVICE MANUAL
External Output Specification

Revision History
Revision Date of
Revised Item Description/Date of Execution
Number Revision
A 2004/02/24 AS-4020 format Measurement error has been
added in the field of test order
record.
B 2004/05/28 Entire configuration. Temperature has been added in
AS-4020 format the field of test order record.
Test strip name has been added in
the test order record and result
SA-4230 format record.
Device name changed. SA-4230 format has been deleted.
AS-4020 → AE-4020
C 2004/09/07 MA-4240 format MA-4240 format has been added.
AE-4020 format Ethernet communication.
Changed into ACK/NAK at every
message.
Changed the packet detection
system into end data.
SOH has been added to the
beginning of sending message.
RS-232C communication.
ETB has been added to a frame
other than the final record.
Test order record.
Sample type has been added.
Message header record.
The device version number has
been fixed to a 10-digit number.
D 2005/01/10 General Errors corrected.
E 2005/04/18 4-1. Communication Ethernet port number added.
Setting
F 2005/07/12 8.AM-4290 format Errors corrected.
10.SA-4230 format SA-4230 format has been added.
G 2006/03/10 6. AE-4020 Standard “W006” (FEEDER ERROR) added.
Format
7. AX-4280-Compatible
Format
8. AM-4290-Compatible
Format
9. MA-4240-Compatible
Format
H 2006/09/28 7. AX-4280-Compatible Explanatory notes of Chinese
Format specifications (unit) added.
9. MA-4240-Compatible
Format
10. SA-4230-Compatible
Format
App.1-2
CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 5
2. RS-232C ................................................................................................................................................. 5
2-1. External Output System .................................................................................................................. 5
2-2. Applicable Connector...................................................................................................................... 5
2-3. Communication Specification ......................................................................................................... 5
2-4. Transfer Rate ................................................................................................................................... 5
2-5. Data Format..................................................................................................................................... 6
2-6. Flow Control ................................................................................................................................... 6
2-7. Output Timing ................................................................................................................................. 6
2-8. Time Gap (Interval between texts) .................................................................................................. 6
3. RS-232C TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL .............................................................. 7

3-1. Communication Control Code ........................................................................................................ 7
3-2. Establishment Phase........................................................................................................................ 7
3-3. Transfer Phase ................................................................................................................................. 9
3-4. Setting of Timeout, Retransmission and Standby Time ................................................................ 11
3-5. Example of RS-232C Two-Way Communication ......................................................................... 12
4. ETHERNET......................................................................................................................................... 13
4-1. Communication Setting................................................................................................................. 13
4-2. Ethernet Communication Frame Structure .................................................................................... 13
5. ETHERNET TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ..................................................... 14

5-1. Communication Control Codes ..................................................................................................... 14
5-2. Transfer ......................................................................................................................................... 14
5-3. Setting of Timeout......................................................................................................................... 15
5-4. Example of Ethernet Two-Way Communication........................................................................... 16
6. AE-4020 STANDARD FORMAT ...................................................................................................... 17

6-1. RS-232C ........................................................................................................................................ 17
6-2. Ethernet ......................................................................................................................................... 18
6-3. Communication Data Structure ..................................................................................................... 18
6-4. Record Format............................................................................................................................... 19
7. AX-4280-COMPATIBLE FORMAT ................................................................................................ 23

7-1. Compatibility with SA-4250, AX-4280 and AJ-4270 Standard Format ....................................... 23
7-2. Block Configuration...................................................................................................................... 23
7-3. Ticket-Printer-Compatible Format ................................................................................................ 23
7-4. Details of First Block (Sample Information)................................................................................. 24
7-5. Details of Second Block (Measurement Result α)........................................................................ 25
7-6. Details of Third Block (Measurement Result β) ........................................................................... 26
7-7. Details of Fourth Block (Measurement result of specific gravity and color tone) ........................ 27
8. AM-4290-COMPATIBLE FORMAT................................................................................................ 29
8-1. Details of Format (Concentration Value Output) .......................................................................... 29
8-2. Details of Format (Reflectance Output) ........................................................................................ 32
App.1-3
9. MA-4240-COMPATIBLE FORMAT................................................................................................ 35
9-1. Details of Format (Measurement Result) ...................................................................................... 35
10. SA-4230-COMPATIBLE FORMAT ................................................................................................ 38

10-1. Block Configuration.................................................................................................................. 38
10-2. Details of First Block (Sample Information)............................................................................. 38
10-3. Details of Second Block (Measurement Result 1) .................................................................... 40
10-4. Details of Second Block (Measurement Result 2) .................................................................... 41
10-5. Details of Fourth Block (Measurement result of specific gravity)............................................ 42
App.1-4
1. Overview
This section describes the details of the specifications about external output of AE-4020, especially
data format and RS-232C two-way communication protocol and Ethernet
AE-4020 external output can make an output in a format in compliance with ASTM-1394. This output
in the AE-4020 standard format is made in the two-way communication between the device and PC.
Moreover, AE-4020 is compatible with a conventional device and it can output a data in
AX-4280-compatible format, AM-4290-compatible format (supports AUTION Sticks only) and
MA-4240-compatible format. The output in these compatible format is made in a conventional
unidirectional communication.
(Note) The details of this specification are subject to change or revision according to the version upgrade of ROM
(built-in software) of AE-4020.
2. RS-232C
2-1. External Output System
RS-232C-compliant bit serial output.
2-2. Applicable Connector

Model: DB-9, 9-pin type (JIS X5103)
Pin No． Signal Name Remarks

2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR Not Used
5 GND
7 RTS Not Used
8 CTS Not Used
2-3. Communication Specification

Transfer mode: Start-Stop (asynchronous) system
2-4. Transfer Rate

Any of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps can be selected. (Default setting: 9600 bps)
App.1-5
2-5. Data Format

(1) For AE-4020 standard format
Configuration: 1 character and 10 bits
y Start bit: 1 bit
y Data bit: 8 bits (ASCII code)
y Parity bit: Nil
y Stop bit: 1 bit
(2) For AX-4280-compatible format, AM-4290-compatible format and MA-4240-compatible format
Configuration: 1 character and 11 bits
y Start bit: 1 bit
y Data bit: 7 bits (ASCII code)
y Parity bit: 1 bit (even parity)
y Stop bit: 2 bits
2-6. Flow Control

Disabled
2-7. Output Timing

A data is output when one sample has been measured and at re-outputting.
2-8. Time Gap (Interval between texts)

To output stored data at a time, insert a time gap of 0.5 seconds (interval between texts) between every block
([ETX] to [STX]). (The setting can be changed.)
One direction only.
App.1-6
3. RS-232C Two-Way Communication Protocol

If the AE-4020 standard format is selected in an external output, the two-way communication is made
between the device and PC. The two-way communication described herein refers to the action that a
receiver returns a control code to a sender to synchronize mutually when the sender has made an
output (a control code or text data).
3-1. Communication Control Code
Code Hexadecimal Description

Number
ENQ 05H Enquiry (Request to send response)
ACK 06H Positive acknowledgment
NAK 15H Negative acknowledgment
EOT 14H End of transmission and request of “Receive
Interrupt”
3-2. Establishment Phase

Device <ENQ> Transmission
y The device transmits <ENQ> if it has a message to be sent.
y If the device receives anything other than <ACK> and <ENQ> after transmitting <ENQ>, the device
performs the same process as receiving <NAK>.
y If the device receives <ACK> after transmitting <ENQ>, the device enters the transfer phase.
Device PC
<ENQ>
<ACK>
To transfer phase
(Frame transmission)
App.1-7
y If the device receives <NAK> after transmitting <ENQ>, the device transmits <ENQ> again after waiting
10 seconds.
y If the device does not receive <ACK> although trying to transmit <ENQ> six times (including the first
time), the device regards the status as trouble after transmitting <EOT>. (Note)
Device PC
<ENQ>
Wait 10 seconds <NAK>
<ENQ>
Wait 10 seconds <NAK>
・・
・・
<ENQ>
<NAK>
<EOT>
If <ACK> is not received

although transmission is retried
six times, the status is regarded
as trouble.
(Note) The status is regarded as trouble to avoid an infinite loop.
y If the device receives <ENQ> after transmitting <ENQ>, the device transmits <ENQ> again after waiting
1 second. (Note)
y If the PC receives <ENQ> after transmitting <ENQ>, the PC interrupts the transmission and waits
<ENQ>. If the PC does not receive <ENQ> after waiting 20 seconds, the PC transmits <ENQ> again.
Device PC
<ENQ>
<ENQ>
Wait 1 second
<ENQ> Interrupts
transmission and
waits <ENQ>.
<ACK>
To transfer phase
(Frame transmission)
(Note) If a collision of <ENQ> occurs, a priority is given to the device and the PC waits the next <ENQ>.
App.1-8
y If no response is made for 15 seconds after transmitting <ENQ>, the device regards the status as trouble
after transmitting <EOT>. (Note)
Device PC
<ENQ>
Waits a response
for 15 seconds
<EOT>
If no response is made for
15 seconds, the status is
regarded as trouble.
(Note) The status is regarded as trouble to detect the line breakage (cable disconnection, etc.).
3-3. Transfer Phase

Frame Transmission by Device
y If the length of record to be transmitted is more than a maximum frame length, the device divides the
frame.
Device PC
Does not divide the Transmitting a record

frame
End frame (ETX)
<ACK>
Divides the frame Transmitting a record
Intermediate frame (ETB)
<ACK>
End frame (ETX)
<ACK>
App.1-9
y If the device receives anything other than <ACK> after transmitting a frame, the device performs the
same process as receiving <NAK>. (Note)
(Note) The device treats the <EOT> response after transmitting the frame as <NAK>, not regarding it as
transmission interruption.
y If the device has no more frame to be transmitted when it has received <ACK> after transmitting the
frame, the device enters the transmission end phase. If the device has any frame to be transmitted, the
device transmits the next frame.
y When the device has transmitted all the frames, the device sends <EOT>.
Device PC
Transmitting a record
The device has the
<ACK>
frames to be transmitted.
Transmitting an end record

The device transmits
<ACK>
<EOT> if it has no more
frame to be transmitted. <EOT>
y If the device receives <NAK> after transmitting a frame, the device transmits the frame again after
waiting 1 second.
y If the device does not receive <ACK> although trying to transmit the same frame six times (including the
first time), the device regards the status as trouble after transmitting <EOT>. (Note)
Device PC
Frame
<NAK>
Wait 1 second
Frame
<NAK>
Wait 1 second
・・
・・
Frame
<NAK>
<EOT>
If <ACK> is not received

although transmission is retried
six times, the status is regarded
as trouble.
(Note) The status is regarded as trouble to avoid an infinite loop.
App.1-10
y If no response is made for 15 seconds after transmitting a frame, the device regards the status as trouble
after transmitting <EOT>. (Note)
Device PC
Frame
Waits a response
for 15 seconds
<EOT>
3-4. Setting of Timeout, Retransmission and Standby Time

Timeout, retransmission and standby time of the device can be set as shown below. Those can be set
individually at every device.
Item Description Default Value

Timeout Timeout due to no response when transmitting <ENQ> 15 seconds
and due to no response when transmitting a frame.
Retransmission The number of retransmissions if <NAK> has been 6 times
received when transmitting <ENQ> or if <NAK> has been
received when transmitting a frame.
Standby Time Standby time if <NAK> has been received when 10 seconds
transmitting <ENQ>.
Standby time if <ENQ> has been received when
transmitting <ENQ>.
1 second
Standby time if <NAK> has been received when
transmitting a frame.
App.1-11
3-5. Example of RS-232C Two-Way Communication

An example of actual RS-232C communication between the device and PC is shown below.
(*) An appropriate value (AB) is specified to a checksum.
[Example]: Communication made when the device sends a measurement result to PC.
Device: <ENQ>･････<STX>1H|$^&|||AE-4020^10405001^V01.00 |||||||||200203111010<CR><ETB>AB

PC: ･････<ACK>････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････
Device: <CR><LF>･････<STX>2P|1<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>･････<STX>3O|1|0203110000001|1|^^^10EA|R||||
PC: ････････<ACK>････････････････････････････<ACK>････････････････････････････････････････
Device: ||||||U||||26^<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>･････････････････････････････････････････････････････
PC: ･････････････････････････････････<ACK>････････････････････････････････････････････････
Device: <STX>4R|1|^^^10EA^GLU|+2^150|^mg/dL||!||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>･･･････････
PC: ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･････
Device: <STX>5R|2|^^^10EA^PRO|+4ÔVER|^mg/dL||*||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>･･････････
PC: ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･････
Device: <STX>6R|3|^^^10EA^BIL|-^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>････････････････
PC: ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･･････････
Device: <STX>7R|4|^^^10EA^PH|^6.5|||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>･････････････････････
PC: ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>････････････････
Device: <STX>0R|5|^^^10EA^S.G.|^>1.030|||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>AB<CR><LF>････････････････
PC: ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･･････････
Device: <STX>1L|1|N<CR><ETX>AB<CR><LF>･････<EOT>･･････････････････････････････････････････････
PC: ･･････････････････････････････<ACK>･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････
App.1-12
4. Ethernet
The Ethernet communication in our device is made using the Ethernet microcomputer.
4-1. Communication Setting

The Ethernet communication is made through TCP/IP. Set the device in a server mode and the PC in a client
mode.
Set the IP address, subnet address, gateway and DHCP in the service mode. Moreover, in addition to the IP
address, a port number is required when communicating through the TCP/IP protocol. The port number is
fixed to “28000”.
4-2. Ethernet Communication Frame Structure

4-2-1. Frame Structure
Frame structure of the Ethernet communication is a communication text only. The frame structure of the
Ethernet communication is different from that of the RS-232C communication in the following points.
y <STX> and <ETB/ETX> are not added.
y A frame number is not added.
y A checksum is not added.
y <CR><LF> is not added to the end of frame.
For the Ethernet communication, a communication text is divided into some packets in a lower level
communication when it is sent and/or received and any information on the first/last packet or packet number is
added automatically as packet information. Therefore, the communication text does not require <STX>,
<ETB/ETX> and frame number. Also, a checksum is unnecessary because it is added automatically.
This specification describes a higher level communication between the device with the Ethernet
microcomputer and the PC.
PC Device
A
Application Application
Winsock Driver
Driver
Ethernet Ethernet
Controller Microcomputer
The figure above is a simplified communication model. This specification describes “A” in the figure
above.
App.1-13
5. Ethernet Two-Way Communication Protocol

The Ethernet communication is performed using the control codes <SOH> and <EOT>.
<ACK>/<NAK> does not mean a correct/wrong response of message (checksum) of the RS-232C
communication. In the Ethernet communication, <ACK>/<NAK> refers to “request to accept”/”request
to reject” for a record that the PC receives from the device.
5-1. Communication Control Codes

In the Ethernet communication, a receiver transmits a response code against a request from a sender. The
response is made at every record. If the sender receives “request to reject” response, it stops sending a
message.

Number
SOH 01H Beginning of message
EOT 04H End of message
ACK 06H Request to accept
NAK 15H Request to reject
5-2. Transfer
(1) Record Transmission by Device
y If the device receives anything other than <ACK> after transmitting a record, the device performs the
same process as receiving <NAK>.
y The device terminates the transmission when it has received <ACK> after transmitting an end record.
Otherwise, the device transmits the next record.
Device PC
First packet
Packet #2
Packet #3
Last packet
Transmitting an intermediate record
Transmitting an end record
<ACK>
App.1-14
y If the device receives <NAK> after transmitting a record, the device stops transmission and regards the
status as trouble. (Note)
Device PC
<NAK>
Regards the status as

trouble when receiving
<NAK>.
(Note) A priority is given to the device in the communication and the device does not receive <NAK> usually.
If the device receives any <NAK>, the status is regarded as trouble.
y If no response is made for 15 seconds after transmitting a record, the device regards the status as trouble .
(Note)
Device PC
Waiting 15 seconds

5-3. Setting of Timeout

Timeout of the device can be set.
Item Description Default Value

Timeout Timeout due to no response when transmitting a 15 seconds
record.
App.1-15
5-4. Example of Ethernet Two-Way Communication

An example of actual Ethernet communication between the device and PC is shown below.
[Example]: Communication made when the device sends a measurement result to PC.
Device: <SOH>
Device: H|$^&|||AE-4020^10405001^V01.00 |||||||||200203111010<CR>
Device: P|1<CR>
Device: O|1|0203110000001|1|^^^10EA|R||||||||||U||||26^<CR>
Device: R|1|^^^10EA^GLU|+2^150|^mg/dL||!||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|2|^^^10EA^PRO|+4ÔVER|^mg/dL||*||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|3|^^^10EA^BIL|-^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|4|^^^10EA^PH|^6.5|||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|5|^^^10EA^S.G.|^>1.030|||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: L|1|N<CR>
Device: <EOT>
PC: <ACK><EOT>
App.1-16
6. AE-4020 Standard Format

6-1. RS-232C
This section describes the frame configuration, etc. for the RS-232C communication. For details, refer to 6-3.
6-1-1 Communication Frame Structure
Communication
ETB
(transmission) data
STX FN or CSH CSL CR LF
(A maximum of 24
ETX
bytes)
6-1-2 Maximum Frame Length

The maximum frame length is 247 bytes (including STX, ETB or ETX, checksum, CR and LF). The
communication data section is a maximum of 240 bytes (247 – 7 bytes). If the data length is more than 240
bytes, the frame must be divided for the transmission.
6-1-3 Frame Code

Number
STX 02H The beginning of text (frame).
FN 30H to 37H Frame number.
‘0’ to ’7’ The number begins with 1 and increases by 1.
When the number has reached 7, it returns to 0.
Data to be Communication text: Refer to “6-4. Record
sent Format”.
ETB 17H The end of transmission block.
ETX 03H The end of text (frame).
CSH Checksum, high order.
Note 1)
CSL Checksum, low order.
CR 0DH Carriage return.
LF 0AH Line feed.
<Example> An appropriate value (AB) is specified to a checksum. For how to calculate the checksum, refer
to Note 1) stated below.
Note 1) Calculation of checksum
Add up everything after STX including EXT (or ETB), divide the result of addition by 256 and then express
the remainder in a two-digit hexadecimal number. Checksum is the first character (CSH) and the second
character (CSL) of the hexadecimal number.
[Example] Add up everything to ETX after STX. Assuming that the result of addition is 1000, “E” (45H)
and “8” (38H) are obtained as CSH and CSL, respectively, from “1000 mod 256 = 232 = E8H”.
App.1-17
6-2. Ethernet
Unlike RS-232C, the frame does not contain STX, FN, ETX and checksum. For the details of data structure,
refer to Section 6-3. (The data structure is the same as that of RS-232C.)
Communication (transmission)
SOH EOT
data
6-3. Communication Data Structure

A data to be sent and/or received consists of several records of hierarchical structure as shown below.
Message header record

Patient information record
Test order record
Result record 1 (Note 1)
Result record 2
Result record 3
:
:
Message end record
Each record consists of several fields. The content of the record is defined by a record type. The number of
fields in a record is fixed at every record type. Any data in a field is variable (the smallest size is 0 by default).
Every field is delimited by a field delimiter. A blank field is also delimited by a field delimiter, so we can see
the field is blank. (The last field may not be delimited by a field delimiter.)
(Note 1) A result record is appended per measurement item, therefore, several result records are appended to
one measurement result. The number of result records varies depending on test strip.
App.1-18
6-4. Record Format

Any field not used in this specifications is not explained, although it is defined in ASTM-1394. Any unused
field number is not described here.
(1) Message header record

A message header record consists of 14 fields.
1. 2. Field 3. Description 4. Remarks (Example)
Number
5. 1 6. Record type 7. Character “H” 8. Fixed to “H”
9. 2 10. Delimiter setting 11. Field delimiter 15. Fixed to “|$^&”
12. Repeat delimiter
13. Component delimiter
14. Escape delimiter
16. 5 17. Sender name 18. Device name 21. AE-4020
19. Device number (S/N) 22. 10405001
20. Device version 23. V01.00 (10 digits)
24. 14 25. Date and time of 26. Date and time of 27. “200203111010”
communication communication
(YYYYMMDDHHMM)
28. 29. End of record 30. End of record 31. <CR> (0x0D), fixed
<Example> H|$^&|||AE-4020^10405001^V01.00 |||||||||200203111010<CR>
(2) Patient information record

The patient information record consists of 35 fields.
Number
36. 1 37. Record type 38. Character “P” 39. Fixed to “P”
40. 2 41. Sequence number 42. Sequence number beginning 43. Fixed to “1”
with “1”
44 45. End of record 46. End of record 47. <CR> (0x0D), fixed
<Example> P|1<CR>
App.1-19
(3) Test order record

The test order record consists of 31 fields.
Number
52. 1 53. Record type 54. Character “O” 55. Fixed to “O”
56. 2 57. Sequence number 58. Sequence number beginning 59. Fixed to “1”
with “1”
60. 3 61. Patient ID 62. Bar code ID (1 to 13 digits, 63. “0203110000001”
variable) 64. If no ID is specified:
65. ”-------------”
66. 4 67. Measurement 68. Measurement number (1 to 69. “1”
number 4 digits, variable) 70. “9999”
71. “0”
72. 5 73. Test strip name 74. Measurement test strip 75. “^^^10EA”
name (the first 3 components 76. “^^^8EA”
are not used although this
consists of 4 components)
77. 6 78. Priority 79. S: STAT 81. “S”
80. R: Routine 82. “R”
83. 16 84. Sample type 85. U: Urine 87. “U”: Urine
86. CNT: Control 88. “CNT”: Control
89. 20 90. Comment 91. Temperature (°C) 93. “25^”
Not used if the temperature is 94. “^”
not corrected. 95. “^DRIFT”
92. Details of measurement 96. “25^DRIFT””
error (Note 1)
Not used if no error occurs.
<Example> O|1|0203110000001|1|^^^10EA|R||||||||||U||||25^DRIFT<CR>
(Note 1) Measurement error:
The details of error are shown below.
Details of Measurement Description Data

Error
Normal Available
DRIFT Change in DARK light quantity Available
REFLEX OVER Considerably high reflectance Available
STRIP DEVIATE Black mark misaligned Unavailable
DIP MISS Dip error Available
ILLEGAL PAPER Test strip type error Unavailable
FEEDER ERROR Feeder error Available or
Unavailable
App.1-20
(4) Result record

The result record consists of 14 fields.
Number
105. 1 106. Record type 107. Character “R” 108. Fixed to “R”
109. 2 110. Sequence number 111. Sequence number 112. “1” “2” “3” xxx
beginning with “1”
113. 3 114. Measurement 115. Test strip name (the first 3 116. “^^^10EA^GLU”
item components are not used 117. “^^^10EA^PRO”
although this consists of 5 118. “^^^10EA^COLOR”
components) and measurement
item name.
119. 4 120. Measurement 121. Qualitative value and 122. “NORMAL^”
value semi-quantitative value of 123. “+2^150”
measurement result. If the 124. “^” (If a data is
measurement item is “COLOR” unavailable)
(color tone), this item shows the 125. “+4ÔVER”
color tone. 126. “YELLOW”
127. 5 128. Unit 129. If this field is blank, there is 130. “^mg/dL”
no applicable data.
131. 7 132. Error flag 133. Error flag (Note 1) 134.
135. 9 136. Measurement 137. Measurement result status. 138. Fixed to “F”
result status This is fixed to “Final Result” in
this specification.
139. 12 140. Date and time of 141. Date and time when the 142. “200203111010”
measurement start measurement started 143.
(YYYYMMDDHHMM)
<Example> R|1|^^^10EA^GLU|+2^150|^mg/dL||!||F|||200203111010<CR>
R|2|^^^10EA^BIL|-^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR>
R|3|^^^10EA^PH|^5.0|||||F|||200203111010<CR>
R|4|^^^10EA^COLOR|RED|||||F|||200203111010<CR>
(Note 1) The values below are used for an error flag.

148. Error Flag
Value Description
* Error
! Abnormal color
Nil Normal
(5) Message end record

The message end record consists of 3 fields.
Number
153. 1 154. Record type 155. Character “L” 156. Fixed to “L”
157. 2 158. Sequence 159. Sequence number 160. Fixed to “1”
number beginning with “1”
161. 3 162. End code 163. Shows whether a process 164. Fixed to “N”
ended correctly or not. Fixed to
“Normal end” in this
specification.
<Example> L|1|N<CR>
App.1-21
[Example] Example of communication without data due to measurement error (RS-232C)
Device: <ENQ>･････<STX>1H|$^&|||AE-4020^10405001^V01.00 |||||||||200203111010<CR><ETB>ABCD

PC: ･････<ACK>････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････
Device: <CR><LF>･････<STX>2P|1<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>･････<STX>3O|1|0203110000001|1|^^^10EA|R||||
PC: ････････<ACK>･･････････････････････････････<ACK>･･････････････････････････････････････
Device: ||||||U||||26^STRIP DEVIATE<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>･･････････････････････････････････････
PC: ････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･････････････････････････････････
Device: <STX>4R|1|^^^10EA^GLU|^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>･･･････････････
PC: ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･････････
Device: <STX>5R|2|^^^10EA^PRO|^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>･･･････････････
PC: ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･････････
Device: <STX>6R|3|^^^10EA^BIL|^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>･･･････････････
PC: ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･････････
Device: <STX>7R|4|^^^10EA^PH|^|||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>･･････････････････････
PC: ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･････････････････
Device: <STX>0R|5|^^^10EA^S.G.|^|||||F|||200203111010<CR><ETB>ABCD<CR><LF>････････････････････
PC: ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････<ACK>･･･････････････
Device: <STX>1L|1|N<CR><ETX>ABCD<CR><LF>･････<EOT>････････････････････････････････････････････
PC: ････････････････････････････････<ACK>･････････････････････････････････････････････････
[Example] Example of communication without data due to measurement error (Ethernet)
Device: <SOH>
Device: H|$^&|||AE-4020^10405001^V01.00 |||||||||200203111010<CR>
Device: P|1<CR>
Device: O|1|0203110000001|1|^^^10EA|R||||||||||U||||26＾STRIP DEVIATE<CR>
Device: R|1|^^^10EA^GLU|^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|2|^^^10EA^PRO|^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|3|^^^10EA^BIL|^|^mg/dL||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|4|^^^10EA^PH|^|||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: R|5|^^^10EA^S.G.|^|||||F|||200203111010<CR>
Device: L|1|N<CR>
Device: <EOT>
PC: <ACK><EOT>
App.1-22
7. AX-4280-Compatible Format
7-1. Compatibility with SA-4250, AX-4280 and AJ-4270 Standard Format
AX-4280-compatible format has some compatibility with the SA-4250 and AX-4280 standard formats, but it is
slightly different from them. For example, because there is no rack number nor port number in AJ-4270 and
AE-4020 and these are not equipped with an independent specific gravity/turbidity measurement unit, AJ-4270
and AE-4020 do not output the concrete value for those items (a blank value or “–” is output). In measurement
with the test strip AUTION Sticks, the item “S. G.” can be measured when a specific test strip (10EA, 9EA) is
used. For the SA-4250 and AX-4280 formats, the measurement result of specific gravity meter is output in the
specific gravity area of the fourth block. On the other hand, for the AX-4280-compatible format, “S. G.” is
output as the measurement result of the item (in either the second or third block), otherwise the measurement
result of specific gravity meter is output in the specific gravity area of the fourth block. You can select any of
these two types of output.
The table below shows the major differences between the SA-4250 format and the AX-4280-compatible
format.
Difference AX-4280 Format AX-4280-Compatible Format
Device name “AX-4280” “AE-4020”
Port number Uses a rack number and port The value is blank.
number.
The number of 10 characters 7 characters and 3 spaces
characters for test strip
name
Temperature Value (00 to 99) Value (0 to 55)
Output of the item “S. Disabled “Enable” or “Disable” can be
G.” in the second and selected in the setting.
third blocks
Output of the “S. G.” Outputs the measurement “Enable” or “Disable” can be
(Specific Gravity) area in result of specific gravity selected in the setting. A blank is
the fourth block meter. output if “Disable” is selected.
Turbidity The measurement result of Nil
turbidity meter is output to
the measurement results 1 to
12.
(Note) To maintain the compatibility with SA-4250, the measurement number of control measurement is not
output. (A blank is output for a sample number.)
7-2. Block Configuration

First block Second block Third block Fourth block
(Sample information) * (Measurement result * (Measurement result * (Measurement result of *

α) β) specific gravity and color
tone)
* Time gap (Data Time Out: 0.5 seconds by default)
Time gap is set also before the next data transmission.
7-3. Ticket-Printer-Compatible Format

The data configuration is the same as that of the AX-4280-compatible format. However, “AJ-4270” is output
because the ticket printer recognizes the device name.
App.1-23
7-4. Details of First Block (Sample Information)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８
V A E - 4 0 2 0 V .
１９２０２１２２２３２４２５２６２７２８２９３０３１３２
B
３３３４３５３６３７３８３９４０４１４２４３
D / /
４４４５４６４７４８４９
T :
５０５１５２５３５４５５５６５７
N .
５８５９６０６１６２６３６４
P -
６５６６６７６８６９７０７１７２７３７４７５
S
７６
ETB
(2) Details of item

Item Number of Description Remarks
Characters
Start code 1 STX
Device name/version 2 Character “V” (Initial of Version)
3-18 Device name, version number
Bar code 19 Character “B” (Initial of Barcode)
20-32 Bar code data (13 characters)
Date 33 Character “D” (Initial of Date)
34-43 Format of “Year/Month/Day”
Time 44 Character “T” (Initial of Time)
45-49 Format of “Hour:Minute” (24-hour display format)
Measurement number 50 Character “N” (Initial of Number)
51-52 Sample type
01: Normal sample, 02: STAT sample, 03: Control
53 Character “.”
54-57 Sample number of 4 digits (0000 to 9999) a)
Control is blank.
Port number 58 Character “P” (Initial of Port)
59-61 Blank because it is not used in AE-4020.
62 Character “-” (Separator)
Test strip name 65 Character “S” (Initial of Strip)
66-72 Test strip name (7 characters) b)
73-75 Blank (3 spaces)
Block end code 76 ETB
a) Not zero-suppressed.
b) Left justification.
App.1-24
7-5. Details of Second Block (Measurement Result α)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１１２１３１４
σ
１５１６１７１８１９２０２１２２２３２４２５２６
υ υ υ υ υ υ
２７２８２９３０３１３２３３３４３５３６３７３８３９
σ
４０４１４２４３４４４５４６４７４８４９５０５１
υ υ υ υ υ υ
５２５３５４５５５６５７５８５９６０６１６２６３６４
σ
６５６６６７６８６９７０７１７２７３７４７５７６
υ υ υ υ υ υ
７７７８７９８０８１８２８３８４８５８６８７８８８９
σ
９０９１９２９３９４９５９６９７９８９９１００１０１
υ υ υ υ υ υ
１０２１０３１０４１０５１０６１０７１０８１０９１１０１１１１１２１１３１１４
▲
１１５１１６１１７１１８１１９１２０１２１１２２１２３１２４１２５１２６
υ υ υ υ υ υ
１２７１２８１２９１３０１３１１３２１３３１３４１３５１３６１３７１３８１３９
σ
１４０１４１１４２１４３１４４１４５１４６１４７１４８１４９１５０１５１
υ υ υ υ υ υ
１５２
ETB
(2) Details of item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
Measurement result 1 2-5 Item name a)
6-7 Blank
8 Error mark (Blank if there is no problem) b)
“*”: error, “!”: abnormal color
9-14 Qualitative value a), b)
15-20 Semi-quantitative value b), c)
21-26 Unit symbol (% in the reflectance mode) a), d)
Measurement result 2 27-51 (The same format as that of the measurement result 1.)
a) Left justification.
b) Blank if any measurement result is not obtained.
c) Left justification, numerical value or character string.
d) Chinese specifications : ”mg/mmol” is changed into ”mg/mmo”.
For the item name, semi-quantitative symbol, concentration and unit symbol, refer to the
calibration curve specifications.
App.1-25
7-6. Details of Third Block (Measurement Result β)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１１２１３１４
σ
１５１６１７１８１９２０２１２２２３２４２５２６
υ υ υ υ υ υ
２７２８２９３０３１３２３３３４３５３６３７３８３９
σ
４０４１４２４３４４４５４６４７４８４９５０５１
υ υ υ υ υ υ
５２５３５４５５５６５７５８５９６０６１６２６３６４
σ
６５６６６７６８６９７０７１７２７３７４７５７６
υ υ υ υ υ υ
７７７８７９８０８１８２８３８４８５８６８７８８８９
σ
９０９１９２９３９４９５９６９７９８９９１００１０１
υ υ υ υ υ υ
１０２１０３１０４１０５１０６１０７１０８１０９１１０１１１１１２１１３１１４
σ
１１５１１６１１７１１８１１９１２０１２１１２２１２３１２４１２５１２６
υ υ υ υ υ υ
１２７１２８１２９１３０１３１１３２１３３１３４１３５１３６１３７１３８１３９
σ
１４０１４１１４２１４３１４４１４５１４６１４７１４８１４９１５０１５１
υ υ υ υ υ υ
１５２
ETB
(2) Details of item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
6-7 Blank
8 Error mark (Blank if there is no problem) b)
“*”: error, “!”: abnormal color
9-14 Qualitative value a), b)
15-20 Semi-quantitative value in the concentration mode. Reflectance b), c)
in the reflectance mode.
21-26 Unit symbol (% in the reflectance mode) a), d)
App.1-26
7-7. Details of Fourth Block (Measurement result of specific gravity and color tone)
(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０

２１２２２３２４２５２６２７２８２９３０３１３２３３３４３５３６３７３８３９

４０４１４２４３４４４５４６

４７４８４９５０５１５２５３５４５５５６５７５８５９６０６１６２６３６４６５
C O M .
６６６７６８

６９
ETX
(2) Details of item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
Specific gravity 2-5 Character “S.G.” for SA-4250.
measurement result Blank for AE-4020.
6-7 Blank
8 S.G.” correction mark for SA-4250.
Blank for AE-4020.
9-14 Blank
15-26 Measurement result for SA-4250.
Blank for AE-4020.
27 Blank
Color tone 28-39 Any of the following is output: b)
measurement result “COLORLESS ” “DARK BLUE ”
“LIGHT YELLOW” “LIGHT VIOLET”
“YELLOW ” “VIOLET ”
“DARK YELLOW ” “DARK VIOLET ”
“LIGHT ORANGE” “LIGHT RED ”
“ORANGE ” “RED ”
“DARK ORANGE ” “DARK RED ”
“LIGHT GREEN ” “LIGHT BROWN ”
“GREEN ” “BROWN ”
“DARK GREEN ” “DARK BROWN ”
“LIGHT BLUE ” “OTHER ”
“BLUE ”
40 Blank
Temperature 41-42 Character “T” when the temperature output is set. c)
43-44 A value (0 to 55) when the temperature output is set. c)
45 Blank
Sample error value 46 Normal – blank, item error – “*”, measurement error – “?”.
mark
Measurement error 47-50 Character “COM.”
51-68 Details of measurement error. a)
End code 69 ETX
App.1-27
a) Left justification
The table below shows the details of error.
Details of Measurement Error Meaning Data
Normal Available
DRIFT Change in DARK light quantity Available
REFLEX OVER Considerably high reflectance Available
STRIP DEVIATE Black mark misaligned Unavailable
DIP MISS No dip Available
ILLEGAL PAPER Test strip type error Unavailable
FEEDER ERROR Feeder error Available or
Unavailable

c) Blank if the temperature correction is disabled or the temperature output is disabled.
App.1-28
8. AM-4290-Compatible Format
8-1. Details of Format (Concentration Value Output)
(1) Format
１
STX
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
D - - ,
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
T : , N ,
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
T e m p E A CR LF
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
G L U , , υ υ υ υ υ
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
, , CR LF
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
P R O , , υ υ υ υ υ
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
, , CR LF
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
B I L , , υ υ υ υ υ
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124
, , CR LF
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141
U R O , , υ υ υ υ υ
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152
, , CR LF
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
P H , , υ υ υ υ υ
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180
, , CR LF
181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197
S G , , υ υ υ υ υ
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
, , CR LF
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225
B L D , , υ υ υ υ υ
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236
, , CR LF
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253
K E T , , υ υ υ υ υ
254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264
, , CR LF
265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281
N I T , , υ υ υ υ υ
282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292
, , CR LF
293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309
L E U , , υ υ υ υ υ
310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320
, , CR LF
321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338
, ,
339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348
, , CR LF
349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366
C O L O R , ,
367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376
, , CR LF
App.1-29
377
ETX
(2) Details of Item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
3-12 Format of Year (4 characters) – Month (2 characters) –
Day (2 characters)
13 Character “,” (Separator)
15-19 Format of Hour (2 characters): Minute (2 characters)
(24-hour display format)
22 Sample type “1”: Normal sample (Fixed to “1” for
AE-4020), “S”: STAT sample, “C”: Control sample
23-26 Sample number of 4 digits (0001 to 9999)
Temperature 28-31 Character “Temp” a)
32-33 Temperature value a)
34 Blank
Test strip name 35-38 Test strip type 7 types, i.e., “10EA” to “4EA” a)
39-40 Line break (Code: CR (0DH) and LF (0AH))
GLU measurement result 41-44 Item name c)
46-51 Qualitative value c)
53-57 Semi-quantitative value c)
59-64 Unit symbol c)
66 Error mark “”: Normal, “H”: Error c)
PRO measurement result 69-96 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
BIL measurement result 97-124 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
URO measurement result 125-152 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
PH measurement result 153-180 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
SG measurement result 181-208 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
BLD measurement result 209-236 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
KET measurement result 237-264 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
NIT measurement result 265-292 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
LEU measurement result 293-320 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
Turbidity result 321-325 Blank for AE-4020
327-331 Blank
333-334 Blank for AE-4020
335-338 Blank
340-344 Blank
346 Blank
Color tone result 349-353 Item name “COLOR”
App.1-30

Characters
355-359 Blank
Color tone result 361-366 Color tone (6 types, i.e., “YELLOW”, “RED”, d)
“BROWN”, “ORANGE”, “GREEN” and “BLUE”)
368-372 Blank
374 Blank
End code 377 ETX
Left justification unless otherwise specified.
a) Blank if the temperature output is disabled or the temperature correction is disabled.
c) Blank if there is no applicable item.
d) The number of AE-4020 color tones is 23. So, when the output is made in the AM-4290
format (6 color tones), the conversion is performed.
AE-4020 Measurement Color Tones AM-4290 Format Output Color Tones
YELLOW YELLOW
ORANGE ORANGE
GREEN GREEN
BLUE BLUE
VIOLET BLUE
RED RED
BROWN BROWN
COLORLESS YELLOW
OTHER BLUE
*Note The AM-4290 format supports the conventional test strip (10EA, 9EA, 8EA, 7EA, 6EA,
5EA and 4EA) only.
* If 10PA is measured in this format, a data of CRE is not output because the output item is
fixed.
* If 2AC is measured, the measurement result becomes blank because there is no applicable
item.
The table below shows whether a data is enabled or disabled when a measurement error occurs.
Details of Measurement Error Meaning Data
Normal Enabled
DRIFT Change in DARK light quantity Enabled
REFLEX OVER Considerably high reflectance Enabled
STRIP DEVIATE Black mark misaligned Disabled
DIP MISS No dip Enabled
ILLEGAL PAPER Test strip type error Disabled
FEEDER ERROR Feeder error Enabled or
Disabled
App.1-31
8-2. Details of Format (Reflectance Output)

(1) Format
１
STX
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
D - - ,
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
T : , N ,
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
T e m p E A CR LF
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
G L U , ,
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
, , CR LF
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
P R { , ,
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
, , CR LF
97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
B I L , ,
114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124
, , CR LF
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141
U R { , ,
142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152
, , CR LF
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
P H , ,
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180
, , CR LF
181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197
S G , ,
198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
, , CR LF
209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225
B L D , ,
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236
, , CR LF
237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253
K E T , ,
254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264
, , CR LF
265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281
N I T , ,
282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292
, , CR LF
293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309
L E U , ,
310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320
, , CR LF
321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337
, ,
338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348
, , CR LF
App.1-32
349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365
, ,
366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376
, , CR LF
377
ETX
(2) Details of Item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
3-12 Format of Year (4 characters) – Month (2 characters) –
Day (2 characters)
15-19 Format of Hour (2 characters): Minute (2 characters)
(24-hour display format)
22 Sample type “1”: Normal sample (Fixed to “1” for
AE-4020), “S”: STAT sample, “C”: Control sample
23-26 Sample number of 4 digits (0001 to 9999)
Temperature 28-31 Character “Temp” a)
32-33 Temperature value a)
34 Blank
Test strip name 35-38 Test strip type 7 types, i.e., “10EA” to “4EA” a)
GLU measurement result 41-44 Item name a),b)
46-51 Reflectance (%), right-justified. a),b)
53-57 Blank
59-64 Blank
66 Blank
PRO measurement result 69-96 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
BIL measurement result 97-124 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
URO measurement result 125-152 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
PH measurement result 153-180 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
SG measurement result 181-208 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
BLD measurement result 209-236 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
KET measurement result 237-264 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
NIT measurement result 265-292 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
LEU measurement result 293-320 (The same format as that of GLU measurement result)
App.1-33

Characters
Reference pad A/D 321-324 Blank
value
Measurement 325 Character “,” (Separator)
wavelength item
346 Blank
347-348 Line break (Code: CR(0DH) and LF(0AH))
Reference pad A/D 349-352 Blank for AE-4020
value
Result 353 Character “,” (Separator)
374 Blank
375-376 Line break (Code: CR(0DH) and LF(0AH))
End code 377 ETX
Left justification unless otherwise specified.
a) Blank when a trouble has occurred.
b) Blank if there is no applicable item.
App.1-34
9. MA-4240-Compatible Format
9-1. Details of Format (Measurement Result)
(1) Format
001
STX
002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011
D - - ,
012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025
T : , N ,
026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038
S CR LF
039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055
, ,
056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066
, , CR LF
067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083
, ,
084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094
, , CR LF
095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
, ,
112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
, , CR LF
123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139
, ,
140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
, , CR LF
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167
, ,
168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178
, , CR LF
179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195
, ,
196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206
, , CR LF
207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
, ,
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234
, , CR LF
235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251
, ,
252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262
, , CR LF
263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279
, ,
280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290
, , CR LF
291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307
, ,
308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318
, , CR LF
319
ETX
App.1-35
(2) Details of Item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
3-10 Fixed to the format of “YY-MM-DD”. “YY” is the last two
figures of the year.
13-17 Format of Hour (2 characters): Minute (2 characters) (24-hour
display format)
20 Classification number ([0], [C] and [S]) a)
21-24 Measurement number (not zero-suppressed)
Test strip name 26 Character “S” (Initial of Strip)
27-36 Test strip name (left-justified and followed by space(s) (20h) as b)
necessary.)
Item data (first) 39-42 Item name (left-justified)
44-49 Rank (left-justified)
51-55 Semi-quantitative value (zero-suppressed, left-justified and c)
followed by space(s) (20h) as necessary)
57-62 Unit (% in the reflectance mode) e)
64 Abnormal mark or trouble number. Space (20h) for a normal d)
value. “H” (48h) for an abnormal value. If any measurement
value is not available due to trouble, a trouble number ([3] or [7])
is entered.
Item data (second) 67-94 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (third) 95-122 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (fourth) 123-150 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (fifth) 151-178 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (sixth) 179-206 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (seventh) 207-234 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (eighth) 235-262 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (ninth) 263-290 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
Item data (tenth) 291-318 The format is the same as that of 39 to 66 above.
End code 319 ETX code (03h)
a) Classification number:
Fixed to [0] for normal measurement.
[C] for the control measurement.
[S] for the STAT measurement.
b) Test strip name:
8EA, 8UA → [URIFLET 8A]
8UB → [URIFLET 8B]
App.1-36
5EA, 5UA → [URIFLET 5B]

Any other test strips are left-justified when those are output.
Example: 10EA → [10EA ]
c) Concentration value or reflectance.
d) Trouble number: [3]: Test strip setting error

[7]: Test strip type judgment disabled
* For 10PA, the number of output item is 10 or more. So, any items after the tenth are not
output.
* The number of characters for semi-quantitative symbol output is 5 and any character
(the first character) may be omitted.
* Troubleshooting in the MA-4240-compatible format (no measurement result)
W001: Drift → [3]: Test strip setting error
W002: Considerably high reflectance → [3]: Test strip setting error
W003: Test strip misaligned → [3]: Test strip setting error
W004: No dip → [3]: Test strip setting error
W005: Test strip type error → [7]: Test strip type judgment disabled
W006: Feeder error → [3]: Test strip setting error
e) Chinese specifications : ”mg/mmol” is changed into ”mg/mmo”.
App.1-37
10. SA-4230-Compatible Format

The data configuration is the same as that of the SA-4230-compatible format. The contents have some addition
and deletion.
10-1. Block Configuration

First block Second block Third block Fourth block
* * * *
(Sample information) (Measurement result (Measurement result (Measurement result of
1) 2) specific gravity)
* Time gap (Data Time Out: 0.5 seconds by default)
Time gap is set also before the next data transmission.
10-2. Details of First Block (Sample Information)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４
M ■ ■
５６７８９１０１１１２１３１４１５１６１７１８
B ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
１９２０２１２２２３２４２５２６２７２８２９
D ■ ■ ■ ■ ／ ■ ■ ／ ■ ■
３０３１３２３３３４３５
T ■ ■ ： ■ ■
３６３７３８３９４０４１４２４３
N ■ ■ ． ■ ■ ■ ■
４４４５４６４７４８４９５０
P □ □ □ － □ □
５１５２５３５４５５５６５７５８５９６０６１
S ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ □
６２
ETB
App.1-38
(2) Details of item

Characters
1 STX
Start code
Measurement 2 Character “M”
mode
3-4 Measurment mode
Character “B”
Bar code 5
Bar code data (13 characters)
6-18
Date
19 Character “D”
20-29 Format of “Year/Month/Day”
Time 30 Character “T”
31-35 Format of “Hour:Minute” (24-hour display format)
Measurement 36 Character “N”
number
Sample type
37-38
39 Character “.”
Sample number of 4 digits (0000 to 9999)
40-43 a)
Control is blank.
Port number 44 Character “P”
48 Character “-”
Test strip name 51 Character “S”
52-58 Test strip name (7 characters) b)
59-61 Blank (3 spaces) b)
a) Not zero-suppressed.
b) Left justification.
App.1-39
10-3. Details of Second Block (Measurement Result 1)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０２１２２２３
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
２４２５２６２７２８２９３０３１３２３３
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
３４３５３６３７３８３９４０４１４２４３４４４５
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
４６４７４８４９５０５１５２５３５４５５
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
５６５７５８５９６０６１６２６３６４６５６６６７
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
６８６９７０７１７２７３７４７５７６７７
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
７８７９８０８１８２８３８４８５８６８７８８８９
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
９０９１９２９３９４９５９６９７９８９９
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
１００１０１１０２１０３１０４１０５１０６１０７１０８１０９１１０１１１
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
１１２１１３１１４１１５１１６１１７１１８１１９１２０１２１
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
１２２１２３１２４１２５１２６１２７１２８１２９１３０１３１１３２１３３
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
１３４
ETB
(2) Details of item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
6-7 Blank
Qualitative value a), b)
8-11
Semi-quantitative value b), c)
12-17
Unit symbol a), d)
18-23
Measurement result 2 (The same format as that of the measurement result 1.)
24-45
46-67
68-89
90-111
112-133
Block end code ETB
134
App.1-40
10-4. Details of Second Block (Measurement Result 2)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
１２１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０２１２２２３
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
２４２５２６２７２８２９３０３１３２３３
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
３４３５３６３７３８３９４０４１４２４３４４４５
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
４６４７４８４９５０５１５２５３５４５５
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
５６５７５８５９６０６１６２６３６４６５６６６７
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
６８６９７０７１７２７３７４７５７６７７
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
７８７９８０８１８２８３８４８５８６８７８８８９
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
９０９１９２９３９４９５９６９７９８９９
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
１００１０１１０２１０３１０４１０５１０６１０７１０８１０９１１０１１１
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
１１２１１３１１４１１５１１６１１７１１８１１９１２０１２１
■ ■ ■ ■ □ □ ■ ■ ■ ■
１２２１２３１２４１２５１２６１２７１２８１２９１３０１３１１３２１３３
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
１３４
ETB
(2) Details of item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
Measurement 2-23 (The same format as that of the measurement result 1.)
result 7
result 8
result 9
result 10
result 11
result 12
App.1-41
10-5. Details of Fourth Block (Measurement result of specific gravity)

(1) Format
１
STX
２３４５６７８９１０１１１２
□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □
１３１４１５１６１７１８１９２０２１２２２３
ＣＯＭ． ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
２４２５２６２７２８２９３０３１３２３３３４
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
３５
ETX
(2) Details of item

Characters
Start code 1 STX
Character “S.G.” for SA-4230.
Specific gravity 2-5 a)
Blank for AE-4020.
measurement
result
Measurement result for SA-4250.
6-12 a)
Blank for AE-4020.
Measurement 13-16 Character “COM.”
error
17-34 Details of measurement error. b)
End code 35 ETX
a) “Enable” or “Disable” can be selected in the setting. A blank is output if “Disable” is selected.
b) REFERENCE : 7-7
App.1-42
App 2
Print Format Specification
App.2-1
Revision History
Revision Date of Revision Revised Item Description / Date of Execution
Number
A 2004/02/03 Error/Trouble Number only. Comment deleted.
B 2004/03/19 Print format Measurement result format changed.
Serial number changed into 8-digit
format.
C 2004/07/16 System setting format Setting for elimination of influence of
creatinine upon albumin added.
Optical system right-standby positition
adjustment setting deleted
EEPROM cleared. Default setting
User setting added.
Start with START key deleted from
inlet operation mode.
D 2004/09/21 System setting format DIP detection threshold input changed
Print format into service setting.
JCCLS-compliant format added.
Chinese character print format
modified.
500 nm deleted.
E 2004/12/17 Fine print of check Color paper measurement result added.
sample
Print format for device pulse

Pulse setting information, DIP detection threshold
information and color tone setting information
added.
Handy barcode setting moved to user
System setting format mode.
Conveyance lever standby position
adjustment added.
F 2005/07/12 System setting format Select ID# setting
Unused ID#
Communication format setting
EEPROM initializing
App.2-2
CONTENTS
1. Overview ..........................................................................................................................................4
2. Printer Specifications .....................................................................................................................4
3. Details of Print .................................................................................................................................4
3.1. Type of Print ...............................................................................................................................4
4. Print Format.....................................................................................................................................5
4.1. Measurement Result ..................................................................................................................5
4.2. Trouble Message .....................................................................................................................14
4.3. Check Sample..........................................................................................................................15

4.3.1. Normal Printing of Check Sample .............................................................................................. 15
4.3.2. Check Sample Detail Print (Service Mode)............................................................................... 16
4.4. List Print ...................................................................................................................................20
4.5. Trouble List Print ......................................................................................................................21
4.6. User Setting Information ..........................................................................................................22
4.7. User Setting Item Number List .................................................................................................24
4.8. Service Setting Information ......................................................................................................25
4.9. System Setting Information ......................................................................................................28
4.10. Test Strip Information (Service Mode) ......................................................................................32

4.11. Reagent Item Information (Service Mode) ...............................................................................34
4.12. Color Tone Setting Information (Service Mode)........................................................................37
4.13. Pulse Setting Information (Service Mode)................................................................................39
App.2-3
1. Overview
This document describes the print specifications for AE-4020.
2. Printer Specifications
The table below shows the overview of the printer used in this device. For details, refer to attached documents.
Technical handbook of CPU for Control of PT8001 LTP8/LTP C Series

Technical handbook of LTP8235 Thermal Printer Mechanism
Item Specifications
[1] Manufacturer Seiko Instruments Inc.
[2] Product name (Product number) Thermal Line Printer (LTPH8235)
[3] Paper width (Effective print width) 58 mm (48 mm)
[4] Total number of dots 288
[5] Number of print characters Standard font: 32 characters
[6] Maximum printing speed 200 dots/s, 40 mm/s
[7] I/O system Parallel I/O
3. Details of Print
3.1.Type of Print
There are 9 types of print as shown below. For every type, the print layout and print item are described and print
timing is shown.
y User Mode
yMeasurement result print
yTrouble message print
yCheck sample print
yList print
yUser setting information print (Parameter print)
y Service Mode
ySystem setting information print (Parameter print)
yTest strip information print (Parameter print)
yReagent item information print (Parameter print)
yColor tone setting information print (Parameter print)
App.2-4
4. Print Format
4.1.Measurement Result
The measurement results contains a normal sample, STAT sample and control sample.
(1)Print format and print item
Print format (Print position) Example of print: Reflectance

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜abbbbbbb No.ＣＣＣＣ｜−[1] ｜ CONTROL No.０００１｜
｜ ID# ＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡ｜−[2] ｜ ID# ――――――――――――― ｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ccccccc dddﾟC｜−[3] ｜ 2003-05-29 21:41 10EA 28ﾟC ｜
｜ ******************************｜｜ *******************************｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ GLU ＮＯＲＭＡＬ８３．０%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ PRO − ８３．７%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ BIL − １００．３%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ URO ＮＯＲＭＡＬ９７．９%｜
｜aPH ＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[5] ｜ PH ９４．２%｜
｜aS.G. ＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[6] ｜ S.G. ７１．５%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ BLD − ９１．４%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ KET − ９０．８%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ NIT − ９１．１%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ LEU − ９１．５%｜
｜ COLOR ＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡ｜−[7] ｜ C/M -9.999 Y/M -9.999 ｜
｜ C/M -aaaaa Y/M -bbbbb ｜−[8] ｜ TONE 99.99 DIP 100.0% ｜
｜ TONE ccccc DIP ddddd% ｜−[9] ｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜
｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜−Perforation
Example of print: Normal Example of print: Measured value out of

normal range (Measurement result enabled)
｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜ STAT No.０００２｜｜*MEAS No.０００２｜
｜ ID# １２３４５６７８９０１２３｜｜ ID# １２３４５６７８９０１２３｜
｜ 2003-05-29 21:41 10EA 28ﾟC ｜｜ 2003-05-29 21:41 10EA 28ﾟC ｜
｜ *******************************｜｜ *******************************｜
｜ GLU ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜｜ GLU ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜
｜ PRO ＋− ２０ mg/dL｜｜ PRO ＋− １０ mg/dL｜
｜ BIL − mg/dL｜｜!BIL ＋２２ mg/dL｜
｜ URO ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜｜ URO ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜
｜ PH ７．０｜｜ PH ７．０｜
｜ S.G. １．０００｜｜ S.G. １．０００｜
｜ BLD − mg/dL｜｜ BLD ＋１０．０３ mg/dL｜
｜ KET − mg/dL｜｜*KET ＋４ＯＶＥＲ mg/dL｜
｜ NIT ＮＥＧ．｜｜ NIT ＋｜
｜ LEU − Leu/uL｜｜ LEU − Leu/uL｜
｜ COLOR ＣＯＬＯＲＬＥＳＳ｜｜ COLOR ＹＥＬＬＯＷ｜
｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜
App.2-5
Example of print: Measurement error Example of print: Measurement error

(Measurement result enabled) (Measurement result disabled)
｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜?MEAS No.０００２｜｜?MEAS No.０００２｜
｜ ID# １２３４５６７８９０１２３｜｜ ID# １２３４５６７８９０１２３｜
｜ 2003-05-29 21:41 10EA 28ﾟC ｜｜ 2003-05-29 21:41 10EA 28ﾟC ｜
｜ *******************************｜｜ *******************************｜
｜ COM: W003 ｜−[11] ｜ COM: W002 ｜−[11]
｜ *******************************｜｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜
｜ GLU ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜
｜ PRO ＋− １０ mg/dL｜
｜ BIL − mg/dL｜
｜ URO ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜
｜ S.G. １．０００｜
｜ PH ７．０｜
｜ BLD − mg/dL｜
｜ KET − mg/dL｜
｜ NIT ＋１｜
｜ LEU − Leu/uL｜
｜ COLOR ＣＯＬＯＲＬＥＳＳ｜
｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜
[1]Error mark (a), measurement type (b), measurement number (C)

a) Error mark (1 two-byte character)
A sample error mark “*” is indicated if an error (electropositive or abnormal color) is detected in the sample
measurement result. A measurement error mark “?” is indicated if an error is detected in the measurement device.
(If both of the two errors are detected, “?” is shown.) This mark can be disabled by changing the setting (user
setup).
b) Measurement type (7 one-byte characters)
MEAS (Normal measurement)
STAT (STAT measurement)
CONTROL (Control measurement)
C) Measurement number (4 double-width characters)
[2]Patient ID number (a, 13 two-byte characters)

If there is no number, barcode nor ID entered through a keyboard, [―――――――――――――] is printed.
[3]Date (a), time (b), test strip type (c) and device temperature (d)
a, b) Date (10 one-byte characters), time (5 one-byte characters)
Date and time of measurement. Three print formats are available, i.e., Year-Month-Day, Month-Day-Year and
Day-Month-Year.
Example 1996-05-21 09:53
21-05-1996 09:53
05-21-1996 09:53
c) Test strip type (7 one-byte characters)
Example 10EA
d) Device temperature (3 characters)
The device temperature is shown by a maximum of three figures and the unit is “°C”.
Example 38°C
App.2-6
[4]Item error mark (a), measurement item name (b), rank (C), concentration value or reflectance (D) and measurement
unit (e)
a) Item error mark (1 one-byte character)
Normal: Blank
Abnormal: “*”
Abnormal color: “!”
(“!” is shown first and then “*”.)
b) Measurement item name (4 one-byte characters)
GLU, PRO, BIL, URO, BLD, KET, NIT, LEU
C) Rank (Semi-quantitative symbol) (6 double-width characters, left-justified)
D) Concentration value or Reflectance (4 double-width characters, right-justified)
If a measured value is OVER, “OVER” is printed in double-width character.
The reflectance is indicated at the same place as the measurement unit.
e) Measurement unit (6 one-byte characters, right-justified)
For the reflectance, “%” is printed as the measurement unit.
[5]pH error mark (a), pH measurement result (D), reflectance (D) and measurement unit (e)
If pH is not indicated in the reagent item, nothing is printed.
a) pH error mark (1 two-byte character)
Normal: Blank
Abnormal: “*”
D) pH measurement result (3 double-width characters) or reflectance and measurement unit (right-justified 4
two-byte characters and 1 one-byte character for unit)
For the concentration value, the pH measurement result (4 double-width characters) is printed.
For the reflectance, the reflectance and measurement unit (%) are printed.
[6]Specific gravity error mark (a), specific gravity measurement result, reflectance and measurement unit (D)
If specific gravity is not indicated in the reagent item, nothing is printed.
a) Specific gravity error mark (1 two-byte character)
Normal: Blank
Abnormal: “*”
D) Specific gravity measurement result (6 double-width characters) or reflectance and measurement unit
(right-justified 3 double-width characters and 1 one-byte character for unit)
For the concentration value, the specific gravity measurement result (6 double-width characters) is printed.
For the reflectance, the reflectance and measurement unit (%) are printed.
App.2-7
[7][8][9] Color tone judgment result print

[7] is printed only for the concentration value (A, 12 two-byte characters).
Any one of the following is printed according to the judgment result.
“COLORLESS”
“ OTHER”
Otherwise;
Concentration Name of Basic Color
“LIGHT” (Light) “YELLOW”
“ ” (Normal) × “ORANGE”
“DARK” (Dark) “GREEN”
“BLUE”
“VIOLET”
“RED”
“BROWN”
[8] and [9] are printed only for the reflectance value and each value of C/M, Y/M, TONE and DIP is
printed.
[11]Comment (Details of measurement error or calculation error occurred during measurement)

The following is printed as a comment.
No. Print Description Data
1 Normal Available
2 W001 Drift Available
3 W002 Black mark misaligned Unavailable
4 W003 Considerably high Available
reflectance
5 W004 No DIP Available
4 W005 Test strip type error Unavailable
yPrint timing
Printed when the measurement of one sample has been completed or when reprint has been executed
in the User menu.
yNumber of printable samples

Data for 446 samples can be printed per roll of test strip (25 m) under the conditions below.
No error in normal measurement
10 measurement items (16 lines and approximately 56 mm per sample)
No line feed in data printed per sample
yPrint speed
It takes about seven seconds to print the measurement result.
App.2-8
(2)Normal print format and print item (JCCLS-compliant)

In the JCCLS-compliant format, a semi-quantitative value is printed for PRO, GLU, LEU, S.G. and PH, and a
qualitative value is printed for any other items. Any other formats are the same as a default format (item, qualitative
value and then reflectance).
Print format (Print position)

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜abbbbbbbb No.ＣＣＣＣ｜−[1]
｜ ID# ＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡ｜−[2]
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb cccc ddﾟC ｜−[3]
｜ *******************************｜
｜ a bbbb ＤＤＤＤ eeeeee ｜−[4]-1 b: Item Name (left-justified), D: Semi-quantitative value
｜ a bbbb ＤＤＤＤ eeeeee ｜−[4]-1 (left-justified), e: Unit: (left-justified)
｜ a bbbb ＣＣＣＣ｜−[4]-2
｜ a bbbb ＣＣＣＣ｜−[4]-2 b: Item Name (left-justified), C: Qualitative value
｜ a PH ＤＤＤ｜−[5] (left-justified)
｜ a S.G. ＤＤＤＤＤＤ｜−[6]
｜ a bbbb ＣＣＣＣ｜−[4]-2 D: Semi-quantitative value (left-justified)
｜ a bbbb ＣＣＣＣ｜−[4]-2 D: Semi-quantitative value (left-justified)
｜ a bbbb ＣＣＣＣ｜−[4]-2
｜ a bbbb ＤＤＤＤ eeeeee ｜−[4]-1
｜ COLOR FFFFFFFFFFFF ｜−[7]
｜ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -｜−
Perforation
｜｜− F: Color tone (left-justified)
Line feed (1 line)
* For a negative rank in GLU, PRO and LEU, the
qualitative value is printed because semi-quantitative
value is disabled.
Example of print: Example of print:

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜ MEAS No.０００１｜｜*MEAS No.０００２｜
｜ ID# ２００４０５２７０１００１｜｜ ID# ２００４０５２７０１００２｜
｜ 2004-05-27 12:34 10EA 25ﾟC ｜｜ 2004-05-27 12:34 10EA 25ﾟC ｜
｜ *******************************｜｜ *******************************｜
｜ GLU − mg/dL ｜｜ * GLU ２００ mg/dL ｜
｜ PRO − mg/dL ｜｜ PRO １５ mg/dL ｜
｜ BIL − ｜｜ * BIL １＋｜
｜ URO ＮＯＲＭＡＬ｜｜ * URO ２＋｜
｜ PH ７．０｜｜ PH ７．０｜
｜ S.G. ＜１．００５｜｜ S.G. １．０１０｜
｜ BLD − ｜｜ * BLD １＋｜
｜ KET − ｜｜ KET ＋− ｜
｜ NIT − ｜｜ * NIT １＋｜
｜ LEU − Leu/uL ｜｜ * LEU ２５ Leu/uL ｜
｜ COLOR YELLOW ｜｜ COLOR LIGHT YELLOW ｜
｜ -------------------------------｜｜ -------------------------------｜
｜｜｜｜
App.2-9
[4]-1.Item error mark (a), measurement item name (b), rank (C), measurement result (D) and measurement unit (e)
Normal: Blank
Error value : “*”
b) Measurement item name (4 one-byte characters, left-justified)
GLU and PRO
C) Rank (4 double-width characters, left-justified)
A rank (semi-quantitative symbol) is printed.
However, if the measured value is NORMAL, “NORMAL” is printed in double-width character. A format of
[4]-2.
D) Measurement result (4 double-width characters, right-justified)
If the measurement is OVER, “OVER” is printed in double-width character.
e) Measurement unit (6 one-byte characters, left-justified).
App.2-10
(3)Chinese print format

An example of print when Chinese (simplified character) has been selected in the User menu is shown below. The
measurement item only of measurement result is printed in Chinese. The measurement item is 6 one-byte characters
left-justified.
Print format (Print position) Example of print: Normal print

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜abbbbbbb No.ＣＣＣＣ｜−[1] ｜ MEAS No.０００１｜
｜ ID# ＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡ｜−[2] ｜ ID# ２００３１１２７０１００１｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb cccc ddﾟC ｜−[3] ｜ 2003-11-27 12:34 10EA 25ﾟC ｜
｜ *******************************｜｜ *******************************｜
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜葡萄糖＋＋＋＋１０００ mg/dL｜GLU
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜蛋白质＋− １５ mg/dL｜PRO
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜胆红素＋０．５ mg/dL｜BIL
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜尿胆原ＮＯＲＭＡＬ mg/dL｜URO
｜aＰＨＤＤＤ｜−[5] ｜ＰＨ７．０｜PH
｜a比重ＤＤＤＤＤＤ｜−[6] ｜比重＜１．００５｜S.G.
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜红细胞＋０．０６ mg/dL｜BLD
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜酮体ＮＥＧ． mg/dL｜KET
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜亜硝酸盐ＮＥＧ．｜NIT
｜aＢＢＢＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤdddddd｜−[4] ｜白细胞２５Leu/uL｜LEU
｜ COLOR ＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡＡ｜−[7] ｜顔色ＹＥＬＬＯＷ｜
Perforation
｜ -------------------------------｜−Line feed (1 line)
｜ -------------------------------｜
｜｜− ｜｜
Example of print: Normal print

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜ MEAS No.０００１｜
｜ MEAS NO.０００１｜
｜ ID# ２００３１１２７０１００１｜
｜ 2003-11-27 12:34 2AC 25ﾟC ｜
｜ *******************************｜
｜肌酐１０ mg/dL｜CRE
｜白蛋白１０ mg/L｜ALB
｜白蛋/肌酐ＮＯＲＭＡＬ＜３０ mg/g｜A/C
｜顔色ＹＥＬＬＯＷ｜
｜ -------------------------------｜
｜｜
Example of print: Other items

｜白蛋白３０ mg/L｜ALB
｜低蛋白１０ mg/dL｜LPR
｜肌酐１０ mg/dL｜CRE
｜白蛋/肌酐ＮＯＲＭＡＬ＜３０ mg/g｜A/C
｜蛋白/肌酐ＮＯＲＭＡＬ＜８０ mg/g｜P/C
App.2-11

a) Error mark (1 one-byte character)
A sample error mark “*” is printed if an error (electropositive) is detected in the sample measurement result.
“MEAS NO.” (Normal measurement)
Not zero-suppressed.
[2]Patient ID number (a)

a) Patient ID number (13 double-width characters, left-justified)
If there is no number nor ID entered through a keyboard, [―――――――――――――] is printed.
[3]Date (a), time (b), test strip type (c) and device temperature (d)
a) Date (10 one-byte characters), b) time (5 one-byte characters)
Day-Month-Year.
Example 1996-05-21 09:53
21-05-1996 09:53
05-21-1996 09:53
c) Test strip type (4 one-byte characters, left-justified)
Test strip type measured.
Example 10EA
d) Device temperature (2 one-byte characters, right-justified)
The device temperature is shown by a maximum of two figures and the unit is “°C”.
Example 38°C
[4]Item error mark (a), measurement item name (b), rank (C), measurement result (D) and measurement unit (e)
Normal: Blank
b) Measurement item name (6 one-byte characters, left-justified: Chinese image data)
C) Rank (4 double-width characters, left-justified)
A rank (semi-quantitative symbol) is printed. However, if the measurement is NORMAL, “NORMAL” is
printed in double-width character.
D) Measurement result (4 double-width characters, right-justified)
If a measured value is OVER, “OVER” is printed in double-width character.
[5]pH error mark (a), pH measurement result (D)

a) pH error mark (1 one-byte character)
Normal: Blank
D) pH measurement result (3 double-width characters, right-justified)
Printed for the concentration value.
App.2-12
[6]Specific gravity error mark (a), specific gravity measurement result (D)
a) Specific gravity error mark (1 one-byte character)
Normal: Blank
Error value: “*”
D) Specific gravity measurement result (6 double-width characters, right-justified)
Printed for the concentration value.
App.2-13
4.2.Trouble Message
y Print format and print item

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ｜−[1] ｜ 2003-05-29 10:45 ｜
｜ＴＡＡＡ｜−[2] ｜Ｔ００１｜
｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜− Perforation ｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜
It is notified that an error has occurred in a device to stop the measurement operation and the following is printed.
[1] Date/Time (the same as measurement result)
[2] Information on Error/Trouble (beginning with “T”)

A: Trouble number (3 figures in two-byte character)
For the details of trouble number, refer to “Error/Trouble Specification”.
yPrint timing
Printed after the measurement result is printed when a trouble has been detected.
App.2-14
4.3.Check Sample
4.3.1.Normal Printing of Check Sample
yPrint format and print item
Print format (Print position) If an error occurs during measurement

(Measurement result enabled)
¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ ＣＨＥＣＫ ¦ ¦ ＣＨＥＣＫ ¦
¦ Serial No. aaaaaaaa ¦−[1] ¦ Serial No. 12345678 ¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−[2] ¦ 2003-08-07 13:24 ¦
¦ ***************************** ¦ ¦ ***************************** ¦−[7]
¦ 430[nm] ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[3] ¦ COM: W001 ¦−[8]
¦ 565[nm] ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[4] ¦ ***************************** ¦−[9]
¦ 635[nm] ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[5] ¦ 430[nm] １００．０% ¦
¦ 760[nm] ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[6] ¦ 565[nm] ９２．７% ¦
Perforation
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦ 635[nm] ９０．１% ¦
¦ 760[nm] ８９．２% ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
If an error occurs during measurement

(Measurement result
disabled)
¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ ＣＨＥＣＫ ¦
¦ Serial No. 12345678 ¦
¦ 2003-08-07 13:24 ¦
¦ ***************************** ¦
¦ COM: W002 ¦−[10]
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
[1] Production number (8 one-byte characters)

Production number of the device is printed.
[2] Date/Time
Date is printed. (The same as the measurement result.)
[3] Reflectance of wavelength 430 nm (Average value of the positions PAD 4 to 7, 4 two-byte characters)
[7] Error comment separator (upper)
[8] Error comment (Calculation result available)
[9] Error comment separator (lower)
[10] Error comment (Calculation result unavailable)
yPrint timing
Printed when the check measurement has been completed.
App.2-15
4.3.2.Check Sample Detail Print (Service Mode)

1. Print format and print item
Detail print format A/D count value print

¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ ＣＨＥＣＫ ¦ ¦ ＣＨＥＣＫ ¦
¦ Serial No. aaaaaaaa ¦ ¦ Serial No. aaaaaaaa ¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦ ¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦
¦ ***************************** ¦ ¦ ***************************** ¦
¦・４３０[nm] ¦−[1] ¦ Strip Type aa ¦−[6]
¦ ＰＡＤ１ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ Pad Detect bbbb ¦−[7]
¦ ＰＡＤ２ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ Mark Width ccc ¦−[8]
¦ ＰＡＤ３ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ Mark Position dddd ¦−[9]
¦ ＰＡＤ４ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ Ch2.eeeee Ch3.fffff Ch4.ggggg ¦−[10]
¦ ＰＡＤ５ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ Spot Diameter hhhhh ¦−[11]
¦ ＰＡＤ６ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ ¦
¦ ＰＡＤ７ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ Pad 1 Inf aaaa ¦┬[12]
¦ ＰＡＤ８ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ 430nm bbbbb ¦│
¦ ＰＡＤ９ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ 565nm ddddd 635nm eeeee ¦│
¦ ＰＡＤ１０ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦−[2] ¦ 760nm fffff Pad ggggg ¦│
¦ ＰＡＤ１１ＡＡＡＡＡ ¦−[3] ¦ Dark hhhhh Dumy iiiii ¦┘
¦ ＷｈｉｔｅＡＡＡＡＡ ¦−[4] ¦ Pad 2 Inf aaaa ¦
¦ ＢａｓｅＡＡＡＡＡ ¦−[5] ¦ 430nm bbbbb 430nm ccccc ¦
¦・５６５[nm] ¦ ¦ 565nm ddddd 635nm eeeee ¦
¦ ＰＡＤ１ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦ ¦ 760nm fffff Pad ggggg ¦
¦ ＰＡＤ２ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦ ¦ Dark hhhhh Dumy iiiii ¦
¦ ＰＡＤ３ＡＡＡ．Ａ% ¦ ¦ ・ ¦
¦ ・ ¦ ¦ ・ ¦
¦ ・ ¦ ¦ ・ ¦
¦ ・ ¦ ¦ Pad11 Inf aaaa ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - Perforation
- - - - - ¦ ¦ 430nm bbbbb 430nm ccccc ¦
¦ 565nm ddddd 635nm eeeee ¦
¦ 760nm fffff Pad ggggg ¦
¦ Dark hhhhh Dumy iiiii ¦
¦ White Inf aaaa ¦
¦ 430nm bbbbb 430nm ccccc ¦
¦ Base Inf aaaa ¦
¦ 430nm bbbbb 430nm ccccc ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
<Detail print items>

The first three lines are the same as those printed normally.
[1]Measurement wavelength (430 nm, 565 nm, 635 nm, 760 nm)
[2]Reflectance at each pad position (Reflectance of one wavelength when Pad 11 has been referenced. 5 two-byte
characters.)
[3]A/C count value at the position of Pad 11 (5 two-byte characters)
[4]A/D count value of white board (5 two-byte characters)
[5]A/D count value of check strip white base (5 two-byte characters)
<A/D count value print item>
App.2-16
[6]a: Test strip type

[7]b: Pad detection data
[8]c: Black mark width data
[9]d: Black mark center position data
[10]e: A/D channel-2 data, f: A/D channel-3 data, g: A/D channel-4 data
[11]h: Spot diameter data
[12]A/D raw data about pad position, white board, strip white base are printed.
a: Additional data, b: A/D count value of wavelength 430 nm, c: A/D count value of wavelength 430 nm
d: A/D count value of wavelength 565 nm, e: A/D count value of wavelength 635 nm, f: A/D count value of
wavelength 760 nm, g: A/D count value of the first 1 ms when LED has turned off,
h: A/C count value when LED has turned off, i: A/D count value immediately after wavelength 430 nm has turned
on.
y Color paper print format

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜abbbb No.ＣＣＣＣ｜−[1] ｜ CHECK No.００００｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ccccccc ｜−[2] ｜ 2003-05-29 21:41 10EA ｜
｜ *******************************｜｜ *******************************｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ GLU ＮＯＲＭＡＬ８３．０%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ PRO − ８３．７%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ BIL − １００ %｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ URO ＮＯＲＭＡＬ９７．９%｜
｜aPH ＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[4] ｜ PH ９４．２%｜
｜aS.G. ＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[5] ｜ S.G. ７１．５%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ BLD − ９１．４%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ KET − ９０．８%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ NIT − ９１．１%｜
｜abbbb ＣＣＣＣＤＤＤＤＤＤeeeeee｜−[3] ｜ LEU − ９１．５%｜
｜ C/M -aaaaa Y/M -bbbbb ｜−[6] ｜ C/M -9.999 Y/M -9.999 ｜
｜ TONE ccccc DIP ddddd% ｜−[7] ｜ TONE 99.99 DIP 100.0% ｜
｜- - - - - - - - - - - - -Perforation
- - - ｜− ｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜

a) Error mark (1 two-byte character)
A sample error mark “*” is indicated if an error (electropositive or abnormal color) is detected in the sample
measurement result. A measurement error mark “?” is indicated if an error is detected in the measurement device.
(If both of the two errors are detected, “?” is shown.) This mark can be disabled by changing the setting (user
setup).
CHECK Fixed (Check measurement)
0000 Fixed
App.2-17
[2]Date (a), time (b), test strip type (c)

a, b) Date (10 one-byte characters), time (5 one-byte characters)
Day-Month-Year.
Example 1996-05-21 09:53
21-05-1996 09:53
05-21-1996 09:53
c) Test strip type
10EA Fixed
[3]Item error mark (a), measurement item name (b), rank (C), concentration value or reflectance (D) and measurement
unit (e)
Normal: Blank
Abnormal: “*”
b) Measurement item name (4 one-byte characters)
GLU, PRO, BIL, URO, BLD, KET, NIT and LEU
C) Rank (semi-quantitative value) (4 double-width characters, left-justified)
However, “NORMAL” is printed in 6 two-byte characters using a field of concentration value.
D) Reflectance (6 double-width characters, right-justified)
“%” is printed.
If the reflectance is 100.0% or more, the first decimal place is rounded off to show 3 two-byte characters + % (1
one-byte character)
[4]pH error mark (a), pH measurement result (D), reflectance (D) and measurement unit (e)
a) pH error mark (1 two-byte character)
Normal: Blank
Abnormal: “*”
D) pH measurement result (3 double-width characters) or reflectance and measurement unit (right-justified 4
two-byte characters and 1 one-byte character for unit)
Reflectance and measurement unit (%) is printed.
[5]Specific gravity mark (a), specific gravity measurement result, reflectance and measurement unit (D)
a) Specific gravity mark (1 two-byte character)
Normal: Blank
Abnormal: “*”
D) Specific gravity measurement result (6 double-width characters) or reflectance and measurement result
(right-justified 3 double-width characters and 1 one-byte character for unit)
Reflectance and measurement unit (%) is printed.
App.2-18
[6][7]Color tone judgment result print

Each value of C/M, Y/M, TONE and DIP is printed.
y Print timing
Print is executed when the check measurement has been completed. This print is performed only if the values of
Service Mode – Service Setting Information – Printer Setting – Check Sample Print are supported.
App.2-19
4.4.List Print
yPrint format and print item
Detail print format Example of print

¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ ＡＡＡＡ−ＡＡ−ＡＡ ¦−[1] ¦ ２００３−０５−０３ ¦−[1]
¦ Time Meas No. Mark ¦−[2] ¦ Time Meas No. Mark ¦−[2]
¦ ID# ¦−[3] ¦ ID# ¦−[3]
¦ aa:bb ccccccc ＤＤＤＤＥ ¦−[4] ¦ 13:56 MEAS ０００１＊ ¦−[4]
¦ ＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦ ¦−[5] ¦ １２３４５６７８９０１２３ ¦−[5]
¦ aa:bb ccccccc ＤＤＤＤＥ ¦ ¦ 14:21 MEAS ００３２？ ¦
¦ ＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦ ¦ ¦ ０００１ ¦
¦ aa:bb ccccccc ＤＤＤＤＥ ¦ ¦ 14:25 STAT ０００５＊ ¦
¦ ＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦ ¦ ¦ ――――――――――――― ¦
¦ aa:bb ccccccc ＤＤＤＤＥ ¦ ¦ 14:46 MEAS ０００２ ¦
¦ ＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦ ¦ ¦ ０１２３４５６７８９０ ¦
¦ aa:bb ccccccc ＤＤＤＤＥ ¦ ¦ 15:01 MEAS ０１２０＊ ¦
¦ ＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦＦ ¦ ¦ ――――――――――――― ¦
Perforation
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
[1]Date of target measurement result
[2]List print header (Time: Time of measurement result, Meas: Measurement type, No.: Measurement result number,
Mark: Error mark)
[3]List print header (ID#: Patient ID number of measurement result)
[4]Measurement result (a: hour, b: minute, c: measurement type, D: measurement number, E: error mark)
[5]Measurement result (F: patient ID number)
y Print timing
Printed when the List Print has been executed in the User menu.
App.2-20
4.5.Trouble List Print

Detail print format Example of print

｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜｜----+----1----+----2----+----3--｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ｜−[1] ｜ 2003-07-10 13:05 ｜
｜｜｜｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ｜−[2] ｜ 2003-06-29 10:45 ｜
｜ＴＡＡＡ｜−[3] ｜Ｔ００１｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ｜｜ 2003-06-29 10:45 ｜
｜ＴＡＡＡ｜｜Ｔ０３０｜
｜・｜｜・｜
｜・｜｜・｜
｜・｜｜・｜
｜ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ｜｜ 2003-06-29 10:45 ｜
｜ＴＡＡＡ｜｜Ｔ０２１｜
Perforation
｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜｜- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ｜
[1]Date of print
[2]Date/Time of trouble
[3]Trouble number (3 two-byte characters)

For the details of trouble number, refer to “Error/Trouble Specification”.
* A maximum of 20 items can be printed in the trouble list.
y Print timing
Printed when the Trouble List Print has been executed in the User menu.
App.2-21
4.6.User Setting Information

Print format (Print position) Example of print

¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ¦−[1] ¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦−[1]
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−[2] ¦ 2003-05-30 13:45 ¦−[2]
¦ User Information ¦−[3] ¦ User Information ¦−[3]
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ No.002 Strip Type ¦−[4] ¦ No.002 Strip Type ¦−[4]
¦ MEAS [bbbbbbb] ¦−[4]-1 ¦ MEAS [ 10EA] ¦−[4]-1
¦ STAT [bbbbbbb] ¦−[4]-2 ¦ STAT [ 4EA] ¦−[4]-2
¦ CONTROL [bbbbbbb] ¦−[4]-3 ¦ CONTROL [ 4EA] ¦−[4]-3
¦ No.003 Data Type ¦−[5] ¦ No.003 Data Type ¦−[5]
¦ MEAS [aaaaaa] ¦−[5]-1 ¦ MEAS [ Conc] ¦−[5]-1
¦ STAT [aaaaaa] ¦−[5]-2 ¦ STAT [Reflex] ¦−[5]-2
¦ CONTROL [aaaaaa] ¦−[5]-3 ¦ CONTROL [ Conc] ¦−[5]-3
¦ No.004 Direction [aaaaa] ¦−[6]-1 ¦ No.004 Direction [ Left] ¦−[6]-1
¦ No.005 Introduce Mode [aaaaa] ¦−[6]-2 ¦ No.005 Introduce Mode [Cycle] ¦−[6]-2
¦ No.006 Buzzer [aaa] ¦−[6]-3 ¦ No.006 Buzzer [ ON] ¦−[6]-3
¦ No.007 Abnormal Marking [aaa] ¦−[6]-4 ¦ No.007 Abnormal Marking [ ON] ¦−[6]-4
¦ No.008 Meas No. Reset [aaa] ¦−[6]-5 ¦ No.008 Meas No. Reset [OFF] ¦−[6]-5
¦ No.009 Printer [aaa] ¦−[7]-1 ¦ No.009 Printer [ ON] ¦−[7]-1
¦ No.010 Copies (a) ¦−[7]-2 ¦ No.010 Copies (1) ¦−[7]-2
¦ No.011 Line Feed (a) ¦−[7]-3 ¦ No.011 Line Feed (1) ¦−[7]-3
¦ No.012 Header [aaaaaaaaaa] ¦−[7]-4 ¦ No.012 Header [+Condition] ¦−[7]-4
¦ No.013 On Line [aaa] ¦−[8] ¦ No.o13 On Line [ ON] ¦−[8]
¦ No.014 Barcode ¦−[9] ¦ No.014 Barcode ¦−[9]
¦ Starting Digit [aa] ¦−[9]-1 ¦ Starting Digit [ 1] ¦−[9]-1
¦ Reading Digit [aa] ¦−[9]-2 ¦ Reading Digit [13] ¦−[9]-2
¦ No.015 Language [aaaaaaa] ¦−[7]-5 ¦ No.015 Language [English] ¦−[7]-5
Perforation
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
[1]Version
[2]Date
[3]User setting information
[4]Sub title of test strip type setting

-1. Normal measurement test strip setting b: Test strip name
-2. STAT measurement test strip setting b: Test strip name
-3. Control measurement test strip setting b: Test strip name
[5]Data format setting

-1. Normal measurement data format (concentration value, reflectance) setting
-2. STAT measurement data format (concentration value, reflectance) setting
-3. Control measurement data format (concentration value, reflectance) setting
App.2-22
[6]Measurement status setting

-1. Test strip layout setting Auto: Automatic judgment, Right: Set at the right, Left: Set at the left
-2. Inlet operation mode setting Auto: Automatic start, Cycle: Cyclic start mode
-3. Setting of DIP timing signal ON/OFF
-4. Setting of error mark (abnormal mark, abnormal color mark and sample error mark) print ON/OFF.
-5. Setting of measurement number initialization ON/OFF when the power supply turns ON.
[7]Printer setting
-1. Setting of printer ON/OFF
-2. Setting of number of printed sheets
-3. Number of line breaks setting
-4. Additional data setting “No. Only”: measurement number only, “+Condition”: measurement number + status
(date + test strip type + temperature),
”+ID#”: measurement number + status + ID number
-5. Selection of language of print item English: English, Chinese: Chinese * Note: Printed for the Chinese
version only.
[8]Setting of external output ON/OFF
[9]Barcode setting
-1. Setting of first reading characters
-2. Setting the number of effective reading characters
y Print timing
Printed when Parameter Print (Item No. 001) has been executed in “SET UP” (User setting).
App.2-23
4.7.User Setting Item Number List

y Print format
Example of print
¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦
¦ 2003-10-01 13:45 ¦
¦ User Information Item No. ¦
¦ ¦
¦No.001 Information Print ¦
¦No.002 Strip Type ¦
¦No.003 Data Type ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:Concentration ¦
¦ 1:Reflection ¦
¦No.004 Strip Direction ¦
¦ [0-2] 0:Auto 1:Right ¦
¦ 2:Left ¦
¦No.005 Introduce Mode ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:Auto Start ¦
¦ 1:Cycle mode ¦
¦No.006 Buzzer ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦No.007 Abnormal Marking ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦No.008 Meas No. Reset ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦No.009 Printer ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦No.010 Copies ¦
¦ [1-3] (sheet) ¦
¦No.011 Line Feed ¦
¦ [0-9] (Line) ¦
¦No.012 Header ¦
¦ [0-2] 0:No. ¦
¦ 1:No.+Condition ¦
¦ 2:No.+Condition+ID#¦
¦No.013 On Line ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦No.014 Barcode ¦
¦ [1-32] Starting Digit ¦
¦ [1-13] Reading Digit ¦
*¦No.015 Language ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:English ¦
¦ 1:Chinese ¦
¦No.090 Trouble List Print ¦
¦No.099 Information Initialize ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
* Note: No. 015 is printed for the Chinese version only.
y Print timing
Printed when the parameter item number print (Item No. 000) has been executed in “SETUP” (User setting).
App.2-24
4.8.Service Setting Information

¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ¦− 1 ¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦− 2 ¦ 2003-05-30 13:45 ¦
¦ System Information ¦− 3 ¦ System Information ¦
¦ for ¦− 3 ¦ for ¦
¦ Service ¦− 3 ¦ Service ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Serial No. [aaaaaaaa] ¦− 4 ¦ Serial No. [12345678] ¦
¦ Rank [aaaaaaaaaaaaaa] ¦− 5 ¦ Rank [W AE4020 mg ] ¦
¦ Strip Dispose [aaa] ¦− 6 ¦ Strip Dispose [100] ¦
¦ Table Cleaning [aaa] ¦− 7 ¦ Table Cleaning [200] ¦
¦ Date Format Order [aaaaaaaaaa] ¦− 8 ¦ Date Format Order [YYYY-MM-DD] ¦
¦ Temp. Correct [aaa] ¦− 9 ¦ Temp. Correct [ON ] ¦
¦ Temp. Print [aaa] ¦− 10 ¦ Temp. Print [ON ] ¦
¦ S.G. Revise [aaa] ¦− 11 ¦ S.G. Revise [OFF] ¦
¦ CHECK Result [aaaaaa] ¦− 12 ¦ CHECK Result [Normal] ¦
¦ Auto Meas Stop [aaa] ¦− 13 ¦ Auto Stop Meas [OFF] ¦
¦ ALB Revise [aaa] ¦− 14 ¦ ALB Revise [ON ] ¦
¦ Dip Miss Judge [aaa] ¦− 15 ¦ Dip Miss Judge [ON ] ¦
¦ Rank Mark [aaaa] ¦− 16 ¦ Rank Mark [ 4+ ] ¦
¦ JCCLS [aaa] ¦− 17 ¦ JCCLS [OFF] ¦
¦ ID# SELECT [aaa] ¦− 18 ¦ ID# SELECT [AE ] ¦
¦ Unused ID# [aaaaaa] ¦− 19 ¦ Unused ID# [ USE ] ¦
¦ Aux ¦− 20 ¦ Aux ¦
¦ Port [aaaaaaaa] ¦− 20-1 ¦ Port [RS-232C ] ¦
¦ Format [aaaaaaa] ¦− 20-2 ¦ Format [AS-4020] ¦
¦ Baudrate [aaaaa] ¦− 20-3 ¦ Baudrate [ 9600] ¦
¦ Block Time Gap [aaa] ¦− 20-4 ¦ Block Time Gap [ 5] ¦
¦ S.G. position [aaaaaaaaa] ¦− 20-5 ¦ S.G. position [Block 2-3] ¦
¦ TimeOut1 [aa] ¦− 20-6 ¦ TimeOut1 [15] ¦
¦ Send Retry [aa] ¦− 20-7 ¦ Send Retry [ 6] ¦
¦ WaitTime1 [aa] ¦− 20-8 ¦ WaitTime1 [10] ¦
¦ WaitTime2 [aa] ¦− 20-9 ¦ WaitTime2 [ 1] ¦
¦ Ethernet ¦− 21 ¦ Ethernet ¦
¦ Machine ID [aaa] ¦− 21-1 ¦ Machine ID [128] ¦
¦ IP address ¦ ¦ IP address ¦
¦ [aaa.aaa.aaa.aaa] ¦− 21-2 ¦ [192.168.100.201] ¦
¦ Sub Net Mask ¦ ¦ Sub Net Mask ¦
¦ [aaa.aaa.aaa.aaa] ¦− 21-3 ¦ [255.255.255. 0] ¦
¦ Default Gateway ¦ ¦ Default Gateway ¦
¦ [aaa.aaa.aaa.aaa] ¦− 21-4 ¦ [192.168.100.100] ¦
¦ DHCP [aaa] ¦− 21-5 ¦ DHCP [ON ] ¦
¦ Drive ¦− 22 ¦ Drive ¦
¦ IntroWaitPos [aaaa] ¦− 22-1 ¦ IntroWaitPos [ 0] ¦
¦ IntroSuckPos [aaaa] ¦− 22-2 ¦ IntroSuckPos [ 0] ¦
¦ SendWaitPos [aaaa] ¦− 22-3 ¦ SendWaitPos [ 0] ¦
¦ Opt. WaitPos_L [aaaa] ¦− 22-4 ¦ Opt. WaitPos_L [ 67] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_R [aaaa] ¦− 22-5 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_R [3364] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_R [aaaa] ¦− 22-6 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_R [1444] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_L [aaaa] ¦− 22-7 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_L [1428] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_L [aaaa] ¦− 22-8 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_L [3380] ¦
¦ Dip ¦− 23
¦ Dip ¦
¦ Reflectance [aaaa]% ¦− 23-1
¦ Reflectance [ 921]% ¦
¦ Program Information ¦− 24
¦ Program Information ¦
¦ Boot ROM: aaaaaaaaaa ¦− 24-1
¦ Boot ROM: V01.00 ¦
¦ Main ROM: aaaaaaaaaa ¦− 24-2
¦ Main ROM: V01.00 ¦
¦ Ether ROM: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ¦− 24-3
Perforation ¦ Ether ROM: ETHER-MB01 V1.00 ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
App.2-25
1.Version
2.Date of printing
3.System setting information title
4.Serial number of device
5.Calibration curve setting
6.Setting of the number of measurement operations to be performed until the request to discard test strip is made.
7.Setting of the number of measurement operations to be performed until the request to discard surplus urine (inlet
table cleaning).
8.Date print format
9.Temperature correction function ON/OFF
10.Temperature print ON/OFF
11.Specific gravity correction function ON/OFF
12.Check measurement result format (normal [Normal], detail [Detail], A/D count [A/D ])
13.Automatic measurement stop function ON/OFF
14.ALB correction function ON/OFF
15.DIP detection function ON/OFF
16.Qualitative value display format setting
17.JCCLS print setting
18.Select ID# setting
19.Unused ID# setting
20.External output setting sub-title
-1. Setting of communication port
-2. Setting of communication format
-3. Setting of communication speed
-4. Setting of time gap between blocks
-5. Setting of specific gravity measurement result output position
-6. Setting of timeout 1
-7. Setting the number of retransmissions
-8. Setting of standby time 1
-9. Setting of standby time 2
21.Ethernet-related setting sub-title
-1. Setting of device ID
-2. Setting of IP address
-3. Setting of subnet mask
-4. Setting of default gateway
-5. Setting of ON/OFF of DHCP usage
22.Drive-related setting sub-title
-1. Setting of inlet standby position
-2. Setting of inlet suction position
-3. Setting of carrier standby position
-4. Setting of left standby position of photometric section
-5. Setting of right drive position of black mark set at the right
-6. Setting of left drive position of black mark set at the right
-7. Setting of right drive position of black mark set at the left
App.2-26
-8. Setting of left drive position of black mark set at the left
23.DIP detection sub-title
-1. DIP judgment threshold
24.ROM version
-1. Version of BOOT ROM
-2. Version of MAIN ROM
-3. Version of ETHERNET microcomputer
y Print timing
Enter the reverse mode in the service mode. Print is executed when [System Setting] or [All] has been selected in
Parameter Print (Item No. 100).
App.2-27
4.9.System Setting Information


¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ¦−1 ¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−2 ¦ 2003-05-30 13:45 ¦
¦ System Information ¦−3 ¦ System Information ¦
¦ for ¦ ¦ for ¦
¦ System ¦ ¦ System ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Serial No. [aaaaaaaa] ¦−4 ¦ Serial No. [12345678] ¦
¦ Rank [aaaaaaaaaaaaaa] ¦−5 ¦ Rank [J AJ4270 mg ] ¦
¦ Strip Dispose [aaa] ¦−6 ¦ Strip Dispose [100] ¦
¦ Table Cleaning [aaa] ¦−7 ¦ Table Cleaning [200] ¦
¦ Date Format Order [aaaaaaaaaa] ¦−8 ¦ Date Format Order [YYYY-MM-DD] ¦
¦ Temp. Correct [aaa] ¦−9 ¦ Temp. Correct [ON ] ¦
¦ Temp. Print [aaa] ¦−10 ¦ Temp. Print [ON ] ¦
¦ S.G. Revise [aaa] ¦−11 ¦ S.G. Revise [OFF] ¦
¦ CHECK Result [aaaaaa] ¦−12 ¦ CHECK Result [Normal] ¦
¦ Auto Meas Stop [aaa] ¦−13 ¦ Auto Stop Meas [ON ] ¦
¦ ALB Revise [aaa] ¦−14 ¦ ALB Revise [ON ] ¦
¦ Dip Miss Judge [aaa] ¦−15 ¦ Dip Miss Judge [ON ] ¦
¦ Rank Mark [aaaa] ¦−16 ¦ Rank Mark [ 4+ ] ¦
¦ JCCLS [aaa] ¦−17 ¦ JCCLS [OFF] ¦
¦ ID# SELECT [aaa] ¦−18 ¦ ID# SELECT [AE ] ¦
¦ Unused ID# [aaaaaa] ¦−19 ¦ Unused ID# [ USE ] ¦
¦ Aux ¦−20 ¦ Aux ¦
¦ Port [aaaaaaaa] ¦−20-1 ¦ Port [RS-232C ] ¦
¦ Format [aaaaaaa] ¦−20-2 ¦ Format [AS-4020] ¦
¦ Baudrate [aaaaa] ¦−20-3 ¦ Baudrate [ 9600] ¦
¦ Block Time Gap [aaa] ¦−20-4 ¦ Block Time Gap [ 5] ¦
¦ S.G. position [aaaaaaaaa] ¦−20-5 ¦ S.G. position [Block 2-3] ¦
¦ TimeOut1 [aa] ¦−20-6 ¦ TimeOut1 [15] ¦
¦ Send Retry [aa] ¦−20-7 ¦ Send Retry [ 6] ¦
¦ WaitTime1 [aa] ¦−20-8 ¦ WaitTime1 [10] ¦
¦ WaitTime2 [aa] ¦−20-9 ¦ WaitTime2 [ 1] ¦
¦ Ethernet ¦−21 ¦ Ethernet ¦
¦ Machine ID [aaa] ¦−21-1 ¦ Machine ID [128] ¦
¦ IP address ¦ ¦ IP address ¦
¦ [aaa.aaa.aaa.aaa] ¦−21-2 ¦ [192.168.100.201] ¦
¦ Sub Net Mask ¦ ¦ Sub Net Mask ¦
¦ [aaa.aaa.aaa.aaa] ¦−21-3 ¦ [255.255.255. 0] ¦
¦ Default Gateway ¦ ¦ Default Gateway ¦
¦ [aaa.aaa.aaa.aaa] ¦−21-4 ¦ [192.168.100.100] ¦
¦ DHCP [aaa] ¦−21-5 ¦ DHCP [ON ] ¦
¦ Drive ¦−22 ¦ Drive ¦
¦ IntroWaitPos [aaaa] ¦−22-1 ¦ IntroWaitPos [ 0] ¦
¦ IntroSuckPos [aaaa] ¦−22-2 ¦ IntroSuckPos [ 0] ¦
¦ SendWaitPos [aaaa] ¦−22-3 ¦ SendWaitPos [ 0] ¦
¦ Opt. WaitPos_L [aaaa] ¦−22-4 ¦ Opt. WaitPos_L [ 67] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_R [aaaa] ¦−22-5 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_R [3364] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_R [aaaa] ¦−22-6 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_R [1444] ¦
App.2-28
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_L [aaaa] ¦−22-7 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_L [1428] ¦

¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_L [aaaa] ¦−22-8 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_L [3380] ¦
¦ Dip ¦−23 ¦ Dip ¦
¦ Reflectance [aaaa]% ¦−23-1 ¦ Reflectance [ 921]% ¦
¦ Program Information ¦−24 ¦ Program Information ¦
¦ Boot ROM: aaaaaaaaaa ¦−24-1 ¦ Boot ROM: V01.00 ¦
¦ Main ROM: aaaaaaaaaa ¦−24-2 ¦ Main ROM: V01.00 ¦
¦ Ether ROM: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ¦−24-3 ¦ Ether ROM: ETHER-MB01 V1.00 ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
¦ System ¦−25 ¦ System ¦
¦ Spec [ 0] ¦−25-1 ¦ Spec [ 0] ¦
¦ Reflectance [aaa]% ¦−25-2 ¦ Reflectance [120]% ¦
¦ Whole Abnormal Mark [aaa] ¦−25-3 ¦ Whole Abnormal Mark [OFF] ¦
¦ Abnormal Color [aaa] ¦−25-4 ¦ Abnormal Color [ ON] ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ Dip Miss Judge Value [ 92] ¦
¦ Sequence ¦−26 ¦ Sequence ¦
¦ Action Start [aaaa] ¦−26-1 ¦ Action Start [1500] ¦
¦ Surplus Time [aaaa] ¦−26-2 ¦ Surplus Time [2000] ¦
¦ Carrying Dtart [aaaa] ¦−26-3 ¦ Carrying Dtart [3000] ¦
¦ Alignment Start [aaaa] ¦−26-4 ¦ Alignment Start [4200] ¦
¦ Alignment Time [aaaa] ¦−26-5 ¦ Alignment Time [ 500] ¦
¦ Mesurement Start [aaaa] ¦−26-6 ¦ Mesurement Start [4600] ¦
¦ IntroCheckPos [ aa] ¦−26-7 ¦ IntroCheckPos [ 0] ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Debug Aux [aaa] ¦−27 ¦ Debug Aux [ 0] ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - -Perforation
- - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
1.Device version
2.Date of print
3.System setting information title
4.Serial number
5.Setting of calibration curve
6.Setting of the number of measurement operations to be performed until a comment of request to discard test strip is
shown.
7.Setting of the number of measurement operations to be performed until a request to discard surplus urine (inlet table
cleaning) is made.
8.Date print format
9.Temperature correction function ON/OFF
10.Temperature print ON/OFF
11.Specific gravity correction function ON/OFF
12.Check measurement result format (normal, detail, A/D count)
13.Automatic measurement stop function ON/OFF
14.ALB correction function ON/OFF
15.DIP detection function ON/OFF
16.Qualitative value display format setting
17.JCCLS print setting
App.2-29
18.Select ID# setting

19.Unused ID# setting
20.External output setting sub-title
-1. Setting of communication port
-2. Communication format
-3. Communication speed
-4. Setting of time gap between blocks
-5. Setting of specific gravity measurement result output position
-6. Timeout 1
-7. Number of retransmissions
-8. Standby time 1
-9. Standby time 2
21.Ethernet-related setting sub-title
-1. Setting of device ID
-2. Setting of IP address
-3. Setting of subnet mask
-4. Setting of default gateway
-5. Setting of ON/OFF of DHCP usage
22.Drive-related setting sub-title
23.DIP detection sub-title
24.ROM version sub-title
-1. Version of BOOT ROM
-2. Version of MAIN ROM
-3. Version of ETHERNET microcomputer
25.System-related setting sub-title
-1. Setting of place of destination
-2. High reflectance threshold
-3. Sample error mark print function ON/OFF
-4. Abnormal color detection function ON/OFF
-5. DIP detection function ON/OFF
26.Sequence setting sub-title
-1. Setting of operation transportation start timing
-2. Setting of suction time
-3. Setting of test strip transportation timing
-4. Test strip alignment start time
-5. Test strip alignment time
-6. Photometric operation start time
App.2-30
-7. Suction standby position for check measurement (difference from normal measurement)
27.Debug setting
yPrint timing
Enter the reverse mode in the service mode. Print is executed when [System Setting] or [All] has been selected in
Parameter Print (Item No. 100).
App.2-31
4.10.Test Strip Information (Service Mode)


¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ¦−[1] ¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−[2] ¦ 2003-05-30 18:15 ¦
¦ Strip Information ¦−[3] ¦ Strip Information ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦・Strip No. aa [bbbbbbb] ¦−[4] ¦・Strip No. 0 [ 10EA] ¦
¦ Type aa [bbbb] ¦−[5] ¦ Type 2 [EA ] ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Pad ¦ Item ¦No. ¦Prn ¦Aux ¦ ¦−[6] ¦ Pad ¦ Item ¦No. ¦ Prn¦Aux ¦ ¦
¦ 1 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦−[7] ¦ 1 ¦ GLU ¦ 1 ¦ 1 ¦ 1 ¦ ¦
¦ 2 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 2 ¦ PRO ¦ 2 ¦ 2 ¦ 2 ¦ ¦
¦ 3 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 3 ¦ BIL ¦ 4 ¦ 3 ¦ 3 ¦ ¦
¦ 4 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 4 ¦ URO ¦ 5 ¦ 4 ¦ 4 ¦ ¦
¦ 5 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 5 ¦ PH ¦ 7 ¦ 5 ¦ 5 ¦ ¦
¦ 6 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 6 ¦ S.G. ¦ 10 ¦ 6 ¦ 6 ¦ ¦
¦ 7 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 7 ¦ BLD ¦ 8 ¦ 7 ¦ 7 ¦ ¦
¦ 8 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 8 ¦ KET ¦ 3 ¦ 8 ¦ 8 ¦ ¦
¦ 9 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 9 ¦ NIT ¦ 6 ¦ 9 ¦ 9 ¦ ¦
¦ 10 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 10 ¦ LEU ¦ 9 ¦ 10 ¦ 10 ¦ ¦
¦ 11 ¦ aaaaaa ¦ bb ¦ cc ¦ dd ¦ ¦ ¦ 11 ¦ REF ¦ 0 ¦ 0 ¦ 0 ¦ ¦
¦ -- ¦ COLOR ¦ -- ¦ cc ¦ Fix¦ ¦−[8] ¦ -- ¦ COLOR ¦ -- ¦ 11 ¦ Fix¦ ¦
Perforation Perforation
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
[1]Version (The same as that of user setting information.)

[2]Date (The same as that of measurement result.)
[3]Test strip information title
[4]Test strip No. aa (2 one-byte characters)
Test strip name bbbbbbb (7 one-byte characters)
[5]Test strip type No. aa (2 one-byte characters)
Test strip type name bbbb (4 one-byte characters)
[6]Test strip information table header
Pad: Order of pads aligned
Item: Item name
No.: Item number
Prn: Order of printing
Aux: Order of external output
[7]Setting of each pad
a: Item name (6 one-byte characters)
c: Item number (2 one-byte characters)
d: Order of printing (2 one-byte characters)
e: Order of external output transmission (2 one-byte characters)
App.2-32
[8]Order of color tone printing

d: Order of printing (2 one-byte characters)
y Print timing
Enter the reverse mode. Print is executed when [Test Strip Information] or [All] has been selected in Parameter Print
(Item No. 100).
App.2-33
4.11.Reagent Item Information (Service Mode)


¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−[2] ¦ 2003-05-30 18:15 ¦
¦ Item Information ¦−[3] ¦ Item Information ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦・Item No. aa ¦−[4] ¦・Item No. 1 ¦
¦ Name [aaaaa] ¦−[5] ¦ Name [ GLU] ¦
¦ Unit [aaaaaaa] ¦−[6] ¦ Unit [ mg/dl] ¦
¦ Meas Wave aaa[nm] ¦−[7] ¦ Meas Wave 635[nm] ¦
¦ Reference Wave aaa[nm] ¦−[8] ¦ Reference Wave 760[nm] ¦
¦ Abnormal Mark Rank aa ¦−[9] ¦ Abnormal Mark Rank 4 ¦
¦ Data Position a ¦−[10] ¦ Data Position 0 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ <Temp. Correction Parameter> ¦−[11] ¦ <Temp. Correction Parameter> ¦
¦ Par.-A aaa ¦−[11]-1 ¦ Par.-A -30 ¦
¦ Par.-B aaa ¦−[11]-2 ¦ Par.-B 2 ¦
¦ Par.-C aaa ¦−[11]-3 ¦ Par.-C 92 ¦
¦ Par.-D aaa ¦−[11]-4 ¦ Par.-D 1 ¦
¦ Par.-E Value aaaaaa ¦−[11]-5 ¦ Par.-E Value 436 ¦
¦ Par.-E Exp aaaaaa ¦−[11]-6 ¦ Par.-E Exp -4 ¦
¦ Par.-F Value aaaaaa ¦−[11]-7 ¦ Par.-F Value -893 ¦
¦ Par.-F Exp aaaaaa ¦−[11]-8 ¦ Par.-F Exp -3 ¦
¦ Reflect Lower Limit aaa ¦−[11]-9 ¦ Reflect Lower Limit 0 ¦
¦ Reflect Upper Limit aaa ¦−[11]-10 ¦ Reflect Upper Limit 100 ¦
¦ Temp. Lower Limit aaa ¦−[11]-11 ¦ Temp. Lower Limit 10 ¦
¦ Temp. Upper Limit aaa ¦−[11]-12 ¦ Temp. Upper Limit 35 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ <Abnormal Color Detection> ¦−[12] ¦ <Abnormal Color Detection> ¦
¦ Judge [aaaa] ¦−[12]-1 ¦ Judge [> ] ¦
¦ Wave-1 aaa[nm] ¦−[12]-2 ¦ Wave-1 430[nm] ¦
¦ Threshold aaaaa[%] ¦−[12]-4 ¦ Threshold 10.0[%] ¦
¦ Positive aaaaa[%] ¦−[12]-5 ¦ Positive 0.0[%] ¦
¦ Judge [aaaa] ¦−[12]-1 ¦ Judge [none] ¦
¦ Threshold aaaaa[%] ¦−[12]-4 ¦ Threshold 0.0[%] ¦
¦ Positive aaaaa[%] ¦−[12]-5 ¦ Positive 0.0[%] ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ <Calibration Curve Table> ¦−[13] ¦ <Calibration Curve Table> ¦
¦ Threshold Information a ¦−[13]-1 ¦ Threshold Information 0 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ Rank ¦ Conc ¦ Ref[%] ¦ ¦−[13]-2 ¦ ¦ Rank ¦ Conc ¦ Ref[%] ¦ ¦
¦ 1¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ ¦ 1¦ NORMAL ¦ ¦ 81.5 ¦ ¦
¦ 2¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ ¦ 2¦ +- ¦ 30 ¦ 75.0 ¦ ¦
¦ 3¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ ¦ 3¦ +- ¦ 50 ¦ 63.0 ¦ ¦
¦ 4¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ ¦ 4¦ +1 ¦ 70 ¦ 53.0 ¦ ¦
¦ 8¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ [13]-3 ¦ 8¦ +3 ¦ 300 ¦ 28.0 ¦ ¦
¦ 11¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ ¦ 11¦ +4 ¦ OVER ¦ 0.0 ¦ ¦
¦ 12¦ aaaaaa ¦ bbbbbb ¦ cccccc ¦ ¦ ¦ 12¦ ¦ ¦ 0.0 ¦ ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
App.2-34
Exception judgment value is printed

after rank table is printed.
¦ ¦
¦<Exceptional judgement prameter>¦−[14]
¦ Par.-A PRO > 69.0[%] ¦−[14]-1
¦ Par.-B CRE < 24.0[%] ¦−[14]-2
¦ ¦
[1]Version name
[2]Date
[3]Item information title
[4]Item No. aa (2 one-byte characters)
[5]Item name aaaaa (5 one-byte characters, right-justified)
[6]Item unit aaaaaaa (7 one-byte characters, right-justified)
[7]Measurement wavelength aaa [nm] (3 one-byte characters)
[8]Reference wavelength aaa [nm] (3 one-byte characters)
[9]Error mark display rank aa (2 one-byte characters, right-justified)
[10]Semi-quantitative value, concentration value output position a (1 one-byte character)
[11]Temperature correction parameter sub-title
-1. Parameter A
-2. Parameter B
-3. Parameter C
-4. Parameter D
-5. Parameter E (mantissa part)
-6. Parameter E (exponent part)
-7. Parameter F (mantissa part)
-8. Parameter F (exponent part)
-9. Correction lower limit reflection
-10. Correction upper limit reflection
-11. Correction lower limit temperature
-12. Correction upper limit temperature
[12]Abnormal color detection parameter sub-title (a maximum of two conditional expressions can be set.)
-1. Abnormal color reflectance judgment expression [none, <, >, =<, =>, !=, =]
-2. Abnormal color detection wavelength 1
-3. Abnormal color detection wavelength 2
-4. Abnormal color threshold
-5. Abnormal color positive judgment threshold (reflectance)
App.2-35
[13]Calibration curve table sub-title

-1. Reflectance threshold information
-2. Calibration table item
Rank (rank), CONC (concentration value), REF % (reflectance threshold)
-3. Setting of each rank
Rank (rank), CONC (concentration value), REF % (reflectance threshold)
[14]Exception judgment setting value sub-title
The value is “DILUTE” unconditionally if the P/C ration is any of items below.
-1. PRO judgment value information
-2. CRE judgment value information
y Print timing
Enter the reverse mode. Print is executed when [Test Strip Item Information] or [All] has been selected in Parameter
Print (Item No. 100).
App.2-36
4.12.Color Tone Setting Information (Service Mode)


¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−[2] ¦ 2003-05-30 18:15 ¦
¦ Color Information ¦−[3] ¦ Color Information ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦・Color Tone Correct ¦−[4] ¦・Color Tone Correct ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ C/M = C'/M' Correct a.aaa ¦−[4]-1 ¦ C/M = C'/M' Correct 1.000 ¦
¦ Y/M = Y'/M' Correct b.bbb ¦−[4]-2 ¦ Y/M = Y'/M' Correct 0.932 ¦
¦ C/r = C'/r' Correct c.ccc ¦−[4]-3 ¦ C/r = C'/r' Correct 1.025 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦・Color Tone Range ¦−[5] ¦・Color Tone Range ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Area No.01 [aaaaaaaaa] ¦−[5]-1 ¦ Area NO.01 [COLORLESS] ¦
¦ bbbbbb <= C/M <= cccccc ¦−[5]-2 ¦ -0.015 <= C/M <= 0.015 ¦
¦ eeeeee <= Y/M <= ffffff ¦−[5]-3 ¦ -0.014 <= Y/M <= 0.03 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Area No.02 [aaaaaaaaaaaa] ¦ ¦ Area NO.02 [ YELLOW] ¦
¦ bbbbbb <= C/M <= cccccc ¦ ¦ -0.015 <= C/M <= 0.015 ¦
¦ dddddd <= Y/M <= eeeeee ¦ ¦ -0.035 <= Y/M <= -0.014 ¦
¦ ･････ ¦ ¦ ･････ ¦
¦ ･････ ¦ ¦ ･････ ¦
¦ ･････ ¦ ¦ ･････ ¦
¦ Area No.10 [aaaaaaaaaaaa] ¦ ¦ Area NO.10 [ BROWN] ¦
¦ bbbbbb <= C/M <= cccccc ¦ ¦ 0.047 <= C/M <= 999 ¦
¦ dddddd <= Y/M <= eeeeee ¦ ¦ -999 <= Y/M <= -0.46 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦・Color Phase Range ¦−[6] ¦・Color Phase Range ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ COLOR ¦ MIN ¦ MAX ¦ ¦−[6]-1 ¦ COLOR ¦ MIN ¦ MAX ¦ ¦
¦ Red ¦ aaaa ¦ bbbb ¦ ¦−[6]-2 ¦ Red ¦ 297 ¦ 30 ¦ ¦
¦ Violet ¦ aaaa ¦ bbbb ¦ ¦−[6]-3 ¦ Violet ¦ 30 ¦ 80 ¦ ¦
¦ Blue ¦ aaaa ¦ bbbb ¦ ¦−[6]-4 ¦ Blue ¦ 80 ¦ 180 ¦ ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
Perforation
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
[1]Version name
[2]Date
[3]Color control information title
[4]Color tone correction sub-title
-1. C/M value correction
-2. Y/M value correction
-3. C/r value correction
App.2-37
[5]Sub-title of hue range of area number 1 to 10

-1. Color name
-2. Range of C/M (minimum value, maximum value)
-3. Range of Y/M (minimum value, maximum value)
[6]Sub-title of hue range of Red, Violet and Blue
-1. Headline of hue angle range table
-2. Range of Red, (a) minimum angle, (b) maximum angle
-3. Range of Violet, (a) minimum angle, (b) maximum angle
-4. Range of Blue, (a) minimum angle, (b) maximum angle
y Print timing
Enter the reverse mode. Print is executed when [Color Tone Information] or [All] has been selected in Parameter
Print (Item No. 100).
App.2-38
4.13.Pulse Setting Information (Service Mode)


¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ aaaa-aa-aa bb:bb ¦−[2] ¦ 2004-10-25 10:00 ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Serial No. [aaaaaaaa] ¦−[3] ¦ Serial No. [12345678] ¦
¦ Drive ¦−[4] ¦ Drive ¦
¦ IntroWaitPos [aaaa] ¦−[4]-1 ¦ IntroWaitPos [ 0] ¦
¦ IntroSuckPos [aaaa] ¦−[4]-2 ¦ IntroSuckPos [ 0] ¦
¦ SendWaitPos [aaaa] ¦−[4]-3 ¦ SendWaitPos [ 0] ¦
¦ Opt. WaitPos_L [aaaa] ¦−[4]-4 ¦ Opt. WaitPos_L [ 67] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_R [aaaa] ¦−[4]-5 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_R [1743] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_R [aaaa] ¦−[4]-6 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_R [ 712] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_L [aaaa] ¦−[4]-7 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_R Mark_L [ 798] ¦
¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_L [aaaa] ¦−[4]-8 ¦ Opt. Pls_Drv_L Mark_L [1659] ¦
¦ Dip ¦−[5] ¦ Dip ¦
¦ Reflectance [aaaa]% ¦−[5]-1 ¦ Reflectance [ 920]% ¦
¦ Color Tone Correct ¦−[6] ¦ Color Tone Correct ¦
¦ C/M = C'/M' Correct a.aaa ¦−[6]-1 ¦ C/M = C'/M' Correct 1.000 ¦
¦ Y/M = Y'/M' Correct b.bbb ¦−[6]-2 ¦ Y/M = Y'/M' Correct 1.000 ¦
¦ C/r = C'/r' Correct c.ccc ¦−[6]-3 ¦ C/r = C'/r' Correct 1.000 ¦
Perforation Perforation
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
[1]Version name
[2]Date
[3]Serial number
[4]Drive-related setting sub-title
[5]DIP detection sub-title
[6]Color tone correction sub-title
-1. C/M value correction
-2. Y/M value correction
-3. C/r value correction
App.2-39
4.13.Service & System Setting Item Number List

y Print format
Example of print of service setting item Example of print of system setting item number
number list list
¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦ ¦----+----1----+----2----+----3--¦
¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦ ¦ AE-4020 V01.00 ¦
¦ 2003-10-01 13:45 ¦ ¦ 2003-10-01 13:45 ¦
¦ System Information No. ¦ ¦ System Information No. ¦
¦ for ¦ ¦ for ¦
¦ Service ¦ ¦ System ¦
¦ ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Information Print <100> ¦ ¦ Information Print <100> ¦
¦ Information ItemNo. Print<110> ¦ ¦ Information ItemNo. Print<110> ¦
¦ Rank Select <120> ¦ ¦ Rank Select <120> ¦
¦ [01-XX] ¦ ¦ [01-XX] ¦
¦ Strip Dispose <130> ¦ ¦ Strip Dispose <130> ¦
¦ [0 or 100-200] ¦ ¦ [0 or 100-200] ¦
¦ Table Cleaning <131> ¦ ¦ Table Cleaning <131> ¦
¦ [0 or 200-400] ¦ ¦ [0 or 200-400] ¦
¦ Date Format Order <132> ¦ ¦ Date Format Order <132> ¦
¦ [0-2] ¦ ¦ [0-2] ¦
¦ Temp. Correct <133> ¦ ¦ Temp. Correct <133> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ Temp. Print <134> ¦ ¦ Temp. Print <134> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ S.G. Revise <135> ¦ ¦ S.G. Revise <135> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ CHECK Result <136> ¦ ¦ CHECK Result <136> ¦
¦ [0-2] ¦ ¦ [0-2] ¦
¦ Auto Meas Stop <137> ¦ ¦ Auto Meas Stop <137> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ ALB Revise <138> ¦ ¦ ALB Revise <138> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ Dip Miss Judge <139> ¦ ¦ Dip Miss Judge <139> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ Rank Mark <140> ¦ ¦ Rank Mark <140> ¦
¦ [0-2] 0:4+ 1:+4 2:++++ ¦ ¦ [0-2] 0:4+ 1:+4 2:++++ ¦
¦ JCCLS <141> ¦ ¦ JCCLS <141> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ ID# SELECT <142> ¦ ¦ ID# SELECT <142> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:AE 1:AJ ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:AE 1:AJ ¦
¦ Unused ID# <143> ¦ ¦ Unused ID# <143> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:Use 1:Delete ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:Use 1:Delete ¦
¦ Aux ¦ ¦ Aux ¦
¦ Port <300> ¦ ¦ Port <300> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:RS232C 1:Ethernet ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:RS232C 1:Ethernet ¦
¦ Format <301> ¦ ¦ Format <301> ¦
¦ [0-5] 0:AE-4020 1:AX-4280 ¦ ¦ [0-5] 0:AE-4020 1:AX-4280 ¦
¦ 2:Ticket 3:AM-4290 ¦ ¦ 2:TICKET 3:AM-4290 ¦
¦ 4:MA-4240 5:SA-4230 ¦ ¦ 4:MA-4240 5:SA-4230 ¦
App.2-40
¦ Baudrate <302> ¦ ¦ Baudrate <302> ¦

¦ [0-6] 0:300bps 1:600bps ¦ ¦ [0-6] 0:300bps 1:600bps ¦
¦ 2:1200bps 3:2400bps ¦ ¦ 2:1200bps 3:2400bps ¦
¦ 4:4800bps 5:9600bps ¦ ¦ 4:4800bps 5:9600bps ¦
¦ 6:19200bps ¦ ¦ 6:19200bps ¦
¦ Block Time Gap <303> ¦ ¦ Block Time Gap <303> ¦
¦ [001-999] (0.1sec) ¦ ¦ [001-999] (0.1sec) ¦
¦ S.G. position <304> ¦ ¦ S.G. position <304> ¦
¦ [0-2] ¦ ¦ [0-2] ¦
¦ TimeOut1 <310> ¦ ¦ TimeOut1 <310> ¦
¦ [01-99] (sec) ¦ ¦ [01-99] (sec) ¦
¦ Send Retry <313> ¦ ¦ Send Retry <313> ¦
¦ [01-99] (frequency) ¦ ¦ [01-99] (frequency) ¦
¦ WaitTime1 <314> ¦ ¦ WaitTime1 <314> ¦
¦ [01-99] (sec) ¦ ¦ [01-99] (sec) ¦
¦ WaitTime2 <315> ¦ ¦ WaitTime2 <315> ¦
¦ [01-99] (sec) ¦ ¦ [01-99] (sec) ¦
¦ Ethernet ¦ ¦ Ethernet ¦
¦ Machine ID <320> ¦ ¦ Machine ID <320> ¦
¦ [000-255] ¦ ¦ [000-255] ¦
¦ IP address <321> ¦ ¦ IP address <321> ¦
¦ [0-255]･･････[0-255] ¦ ¦ [0-255]･･････[0-255] ¦
¦ Sub Net Mask <322> ¦ ¦ Sub Net Mask <322> ¦
¦ [0-255]･･････[0-255] ¦ ¦ [0-255]･･････[0-255] ¦
¦ Default Gateway <323> ¦ ¦ Default Gateway <323> ¦
¦ [0-255]･･････[0-255] ¦ ¦ [0-255]･･････[0-255] ¦
¦ DHCP <324> ¦ ¦ DHCP <324> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ Mechanism Test ¦ ¦ Mechanism Test ¦
¦ Unit <400> ¦ ¦ Unit <400> ¦
¦ Sensor <410> ¦ ¦ Sensor <410> ¦
¦ Opt. Light adjustment <420> ¦ ¦ Opt. Light adjustment <420> ¦
¦ Opt. Level <421> ¦ ¦ Opt. Level <421> ¦
¦ Intro. Wait Pos. adjust<430> ¦ ¦ Intro. Wait Pos. adjust<430> ¦
¦ Intro. Suck Pos. adjust<440> ¦ ¦ Intro. Suck Pos. adjust<440> ¦
¦ Send. Wait Pos. adjust <450> ¦ ¦ Send. Wait Pos. adjust <450> ¦
¦ Opt. Wait Pos. L <460> ¦ ¦ Opt. Wait Pos. L <460> ¦
¦ Opt. Mark Pos. adjust_R<470> ¦ ¦ Opt. Mark Pos. adjust R<470> ¦
¦ Opt. Mark Pos. adjust_L<471> ¦ ¦ Opt. Mark Pos. adjust L<471> ¦
¦ Color adjust R <480> ¦ ¦ Color adjust R <480> ¦
¦ Arrive Sensor Disp <500> ¦ ¦ Arrive Sensor Disp <500> ¦
¦ Temperature Disp <510> ¦ ¦ Temperature Disp <510> ¦
¦ MeasInf Edit ¦ ¦ MeasInf Edit ¦
¦ Intro. Wait Pos. <520> ¦ ¦ Intro. Wait Pos. <520> ¦
¦ Intro. Suck Pos. <521> ¦ ¦ Intro. Suck Pos. <521> ¦
¦ Send. Wait Pos. <522> ¦ ¦ Send. Wait Pos. <522> ¦
¦ Opt. Wait Pos. L <523> ¦ ¦ Opt. Wait Pos. L <523> ¦
¦ Opt. Mark Pos. R_R <524> ¦ ¦ Opt. Mark Pos. R_R <524> ¦
¦ Opt. Mark Pos. L_R <525> ¦ ¦ Opt. Mark Pos. L_R <525> ¦
¦ Opt. Mark Pos. R_L <526> ¦ ¦ Opt. Mark Pos. R_L <526> ¦
¦ Opt. Mark Pos. L_L <527> ¦ ¦ Opt. Mark Pos. L_L <527> ¦
¦ [0000-9999] ¦ ¦ [0000-9999] ¦
¦ C/M Correct <528> ¦ ¦ C/M Correct <528> ¦
¦ Y/M Correct <529> ¦ ¦ Y/M Correct <529> ¦
¦ C/r Correct <530> ¦ ¦ C/r Correct <530> ¦
¦ [0000-9999] (0.001) ¦ ¦ [0000-9999] (0.001) ¦
App.2-41
¦ Dip Reflectance <531> ¦ ¦ Dip Reflectance <531> ¦

¦ [0000-9999] (0.1%) ¦ ¦ [0000-9999] (0.1%) ¦
¦ Rank Edit <550> ¦ ¦ Rank Edit <550> ¦
¦ [0000-9999] (0.1%) ¦ ¦ [0000-9999] (0.1%) ¦
¦ Dilute judgement ¦ ¦ Dilute judgement ¦
¦ PRO [0000-9999] (0.1%) <560> ¦ ¦ PRO [0000-9999] (0.1%) <560> ¦
¦ CRE [0000-9999] (0.1%) <561> ¦ ¦ CRE [0000-9999] (0.1%) <561> ¦
¦ Aution Net <600> ¦ ¦ Aution Net <600> ¦
¦ Select Strip <610> ¦ ¦ Select Strip <610> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦ ¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ Memory Clear <900> ¦ ¦ Memory Clear <900> ¦
¦ Eeprom Initialize <990> ¦ ¦ Eeprom Initialize <990> ¦
¦ [0-8] 1:System Information ¦ ¦ [0-8] 1:System Information ¦
¦ 2:User Information ¦ ¦ 2:User Information ¦
¦ 3:Strip Information ¦ ¦ 3:Strip Information ¦
¦ 4:Item Information ¦ ¦ 4:Item Information ¦
¦ 5:Color Information ¦ ¦ 5:Color Information ¦
¦ 6:Shipment ¦ ¦ 6:Shipment ¦
¦ 7:Ether Inspection ¦ ¦ 7:Ether Inspection ¦
¦ 8:RS Inspection ¦ ¦ 8:RS Inspection ¦
¦ 0:All ¦ ¦ 0:All ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦ ¦ ¦
¦ Serial No. <700> ¦
¦ [00000000-99999999] ¦
¦ Spec <701> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:ARKRAY 1:OTHER ¦
¦ Reflectance <710> ¦
¦ [000-999] (%) ¦
¦ Whole Abnormal Mark Print<711> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦ Abnormal Color <712> ¦
¦ [0-1] 0:OFF 1:ON ¦
¦- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ¦
y Print timing
Enter the reverse mode. Print is executed when the print of parameter item number list (Item No. 110) has been
performed.
App.2-42
App 3
Error & Trouble Specification
App.3-1
Revision History
Revision Date of
Revised Item Description/Date of Execution
Number Revision
2003/11/27 New
A 2004/01/13 3. Trouble Change trouble numbers to
distinguish them from error
numbers
B 2004/08/20 General Modifying user corrective
procedure
C 2005/01/27 General Change notation
D 2005/03/12 T134 Low A/Ded value Change reference 1500 → 1650
T135 Excessive A/Ded Change reference 500 → 700
dark 2500 → 2700
White board A/D correction
E 2005/04/28 T137 Undetected black Add processing method
mark
App.3-2
1. Warning 4
1.1. Definition of warning 4
1.2. Upon occurrence of warning 4
1.3. Warning 5
1.3.1. W001 (Drift) 5
1.3.2. W002 (Reflectance is excessively high) 5
1.3.3. W003 (Incorrect positioning of test strip) 6
1.3.4. W004 (No DIP) 6
1.3.5. W005 (Wrong test strip type) 7
2. ERROR .................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.1. Definition of error 8
2.2. Upon occurrence of error 8
2.2.1. E001 (Power-down) 9
2.2.2. E002 (Abnormal backup voltage) 9
2.2.3. E004 (Printer paper out) 10
2.2.4. E005 (Waste box full) 10
2.2.5. E006 (Surplus urine full) 11
2.2.6. E007 (No applicable data) 11
2.2.7. E008 (Auto start sensor error) 12
2.2.8. E009 (No test strip on transport section) 12
3. TROUBLE ........................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1. Definition of trouble 13
3.2. Upon occurrence of trouble 13
3.2.1. T101 (EEPROM error) 14
3.2.2. T102 (Version change) 14
3.2.3. T110 (No analytical curve) 15
3.2.4. T120 (Inlet error) 16
3.2.5. T121 (Transport section error) 17
3.2.6. T123 (Incoming test strip detection error) 18
3.2.7. T130 (Photometric section initialization error) 19
3.2.8. T131 (Photometric section operation error) 20
3.2.9. T132 (A/D overflow) 21
3.2.10. T133 (A/D overrange) 22
3.2.11. T134 (Low A/Ded value) 23
3.2.12. T135 (Excessive A/Ded dark) 24
3.2.13. T137 (Undetected black mark) 25
3.2.14. T138 (Test strip feed error) 26
3.2.15. T160 (Initialization failure) 27
3.2.16. T170 (External output initialization failure) 28
3.2.17. T171 (Two-way communication error) 29
App.3-3
1. Warning
1.1. Definition of warning
Warning indicates that the result of measurement is not reliable although no operational problem occurred
during measurement.
1.2. Upon occurrence of warning

Even if warning occurs during measurement, it is not indicated and measurement is continued. The printout of
measurement record includes comment about the warning.
App.3-4
1.3. Warning
1.3.1. W001 (Drift)
Description y Difference between Max. and Min. dark counts exceeds the threshold.
y Difference was determined at the end of photometry of a sample.
Possible cause y Disturbing light entered through front maintenance cover.
y Disturbing light entered through slit of waste box.
y Error or fault, e.g. excessive offset, in electrical circuit (detector and associated
circuitry).
Action taken by y Install waste box in place.
user y Change orientation of the device.
Action taken by y Check photometric section (optical system).
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “420”, check A/Ded dark value.
Process y Includes W001 on printout. (Does not print measurement result.)
y Continues measurement.
Display None
Printing
| ******************************** |
| COM: W001 |
| ******************************** |
Remarks y Threshold (dark max. − dark min.): 50 counts
1.3.2. W002 (Reflectance is excessively high)

Description y Reflectance at a section on test strip exceeded 120%.
y Judgment is made at the end of photometry of a sample.
Possible cause y Drug-containing urine or abnormal sample was measured.
y Measured test strip was not the selected one.
Action taken by y Check to see that the measured sample is normal.
user y Verify that selected test strip is used for measurement.
Action taken by y Check the photometric section (optical system).
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “420”, check A/Ded dark value.
Process y Includes W002 on printout. (Prints measurement result.)
Display None
Printing
| ******************************** |
| COM: W002 |
| ******************************** |
Remarks
App.3-5
1.3.3. W003 (Incorrect positioning of test strip)

Description y Center of black mark on the test strip was not at the adjustment base point.
y Judgment is made at the end of photometry of a sample.
Possible cause y Test strip was laterally displaced due to vibration applied to the unit.
y Test strip was laterally displaced because it was not correctly set on the test strip inlet.
Action taken by y Do not move the unit during measurement. Do not apply shock to the unit.
user y Correctly set the test strip.
Action taken by y Check the test strip transportation status.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “420”, check A/Ded waveform length.
y In the reverse mode “470”, “471”, readjust position of black mark.
Display None
Printing
| ******************************** |
| COM: W003 |
| ******************************** |
Remarks y Displacement tolerance: adjustment base point ±3 mm
1.3.4. W004 (No DIP)

Description y Reflectance of REF pad is higher than the reference reflectance for the device.
y Higher or not was determined at the end of photometry of a sample.
Possible cause y Measurement was done without DIP to REF pad.
y White board is dirty.
Action taken by y Dip it to the sample with REF pad.
user y Clean white board.
Action taken by y Check transport status.
y Check DIP reference for judgment.
In the reverse mode “100”, print the adjusted value in the following sequence: →
“ENT” → “6” → “ENT”
Change the output form of measurement result to reflection mode. Reprint the sample
printed as W004 and other samples. Check the printed “DIP” value and adjusted value.
y In the reverse mode “480”, readjust DIP threshold.
Process y Includes W004 on printout. (Prints measurement result.)
Display None
Printing
| ******************************** |
| COM: W004 |
| ******************************** |
Remarks Judging method: Based on comparison of reflectance on REF pad with that
on white board.
If the measurement result has no problem and only judgment on “W004” is to
be discontinued, enter the reverse mode “139” → “ENT” → “0” → “ENT” to
turn OFF “with/without DIP detection”.
App.3-6
1.3.5. W005 (Wrong test strip type)

Description y Black mark pattern on the measured test strip was different from that on the specified
test strip.
y Width of the black mark was different from that on the specified test strip.
y The distance from the tip of test strip to the center of black mark was different from
that on the specified test strip.
y Judgment is made at the end of photometry of each sample.
Possible cause y Measurement was done on a test strip not specified.
y The test strip is not on the specified position.
y A test strip being incorrectly transferred interferes photometric position.
Action taken by y Measure by using the specified test strip.
user y Do not moisten mark.
y Do not apply vibration during measurement.
Action taken by y Check status of transportation system.
y Check the test strip being used.
Display None
Printing
| ******************************** |
| COM: W005 |
| ******************************** |
Remarks When using AUTION Sticks series test strip with 4 mm wide mark,
AUTION screen 2AC, 10PA is automatically judged and result is output.
App.3-7
2. Error
2.1. Definition of error
An error message indicates that the device must be stopped because the user misuses the device or operates it
in a wrong wary.
2.2. Upon occurrence of error

The following error message is displayed and the buzzer intermittently beeps for 1 minute.
E001 Ent
ENTER key releases the error and returns to the standby screen.
App.3-8
2.2.1. E001 (Power-down)

Description y Power to the device was shut down during measurement.
y Judgment is made upon turning on of the device.
Possible cause y Power failure occurred during measurement.
y Power was turned off during measurement. (Maintenance cover was opened.)
y Power cable was disconnected during measurement.
Action taken by None
user
Action taken by y Check power cable for disconnection.
manufacturer
Process y Displays the error message.
Display
Ｅ００１ＥＮＴ
Printing None
Remarks y Definition of “during measurement”: time span from the start to the end of measuring
operation.
y The previous measurement is made invalid (valid if measurement result has been
output).
y Error message remains displayed until [ENTER] key is pressed.
2.2.2. E002 (Abnormal backup voltage)

Description y Backup power supply to the backup memory is abnormal, causing checksum error.
y Judgment is made upon turning on of the device.
Possible cause y Power to the device has been left off for approx. 3 months, causing a loss of backed
up data.
Action taken by y Charge the backup battery continuously for at least 11 hours.
user
Action taken by y Check the battery voltage: 3 V.
manufacturer
Display
Ｅ００２ＥＮＴ
Printing None
Remarks y Error message remains displayed until [ENTER] key is pressed.
App.3-9
2.2.3. E004 (Printer paper out)

Description y Printer is in paper-out condition.
y Condition is checked during measurement, printing and standby.
Possible cause y No printer paper is available.
y Printer paper is not in place.
y FEED key has not been pressed after installation of printer paper.
Action taken by y Set printer paper in place.
user y Press FEED key after setting printer paper.
Action taken by y Verify correct connection between the printer and main board.
manufacturer y Check the voltage of power supply to main board.
Display
Ｅ００４ＥＮＴ
Printing None
y Once the paper out occurs during measurement, the screen will not return to the
standby screen until the paper is supplied and remaining measurement records are
printed.
y Power supply pins:
J2 1–2 pins + 5 V
3–4 pins + 5 V
5–6 pins + 5 V
2.2.4. E005 (Waste box full)

Description y Waste box is full.
y Condition is determined at the end of measurement.
Possible cause y Waste box is full of test strips. (More than 90 samples have been measured.)
Action taken by y Remove the test strips from the waste box.
user
manufacturer
Display
Ｅ００５ＥＮＴ
Ｅ００５［１］
Printing None
Remarks y Displayed error message will be replaced with [1] upon pressing [ENTER] key. Press
[1] key to return to standby screen.
y When waste box becomes full during measurement, FULL icon blinks, prompting
removal of test strips.
App.3-10
2.2.5. E006 (Surplus urine full)

Description y Full of surplus urine
y Condition is determined at the end of measurement.
Possible cause y Full of surplus urine (No. of measured samples exceeds 190.)
Action taken by y Turn off power to the device, open maintenance cover and dispose of surplus urine.
user
manufacturer
Display
Ｅ００５ＥＮＴ
Ｅ００５ＯＦＦ
Printing None
Remarks y Displayed error message will be replaced with [OFF] upon pressing [ENTER]. While
[OFF] is displayed on the screen, no subsequent operation is accepted.
y When surplus urine full condition is detected during measurement, FULL icon blinks,
prompting removal of surplus urine.
2.2.6. E007 (No applicable data)

Description y Data for reprinting, retransmission or list printing is not found.
y Found/not found is determined during reprinting or retransmission of memory data or
retrieval of list print data.
Possible cause y Measurement data not stored in backup memory is specified.
Action taken by y Check whether the specified searching range is correct.
user
manufacturer
Display
Ｅ００７ＥＮＴ
Printing None
App.3-11
2.2.7. E008 (Auto start sensor error)

Description y Introduction lever has moved to suction ports but it is “detected” by auto start sensor.
y Judgment is made while introduction lever is operating.
Possible cause y Test strip is placed on the detection window with the introduction lever moved to
suction ports.
y Detection window is dirty.
y Auto start sensor is defective.
Action taken by y Remove the test strip.
user y Clean detection window.
Action taken by y Auto start sensor may be defective. In the reverse mode “400”, check and adjust
manufacturer sensor level.
Display
Ｅ００８ＥＮＴ
Printing None
2.2.8. E009 (No test strip on transport section)

Description y Incoming strip sensor failed to detect the test strip introduced by auto start feature.
y Operation of the sensor is checked during the first measurement after power up. (To
verify installation of transport lever)
Possible cause y Transport lever is not installed.
y Detection window is dirty.
y Incoming strip sensor is defective.
y Detection level is not correctly adjusted.
Action taken by y Check to see if the transport lever is installed.
user y Clean detection window.
Action taken by y Incoming strip sensor may be defective. In the reverse mode “500”, check detection
manufacturer level and, if necessary, adjust sensitivity.
Display
Ｅ００９ＥＮＴ
Printing None
y PI detection level: 100±5 counts without test strip
900 counts or more with test strip placed
App.3-12
3. Trouble
3.1. Definition of trouble
Trouble is defined as a problem created in AE-4020, causing itself to halt.
3.2. Upon occurrence of trouble

Shows a trouble No. as shown below. The device may stop immediately upon encountering a certain problem
with/without test strip remaining on the device. It will beep the buzzer repeatedly for 1 minute.
T121 Ent
Pressing ENTER key will cancel the trouble and go to system initialization comfirmation screen.
T121 [1]
[1] key starts the system initialization.
App.3-13
3.2.1. T101 (EEPROM error)

Description y EEPROM data checksum did not match.
y Judgment is made upon power-up.
Possible cause y Power was turned off while writing to EEPROM.
y Data stored on EEPROM was destroyed.
y EEPROM is electrically faulty.
user
Action taken by y Print out parameters to analyze EEPROM.
manufacturer
Display
Ｔ１０１ＥＮＴ
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１０１ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Trouble message will be displayed. Pressing [ENTER] will clear the problem.
Even if the problem is removed, EEPROM is not initialized. Initialization will be
performed in service mode.
3.2.2. T102 (Version change)

Description y Version of ROM contents is different from that of contents stored in RAM.
y Version is checked on power-up.
Possible cause y Program was updated.
y Contents of backup RAM were destroyed.
y Backup RAM is electrically faulty.
user
Action taken by y Possible cause may be located in backup RAM. Check the battery voltage (3.0 V).
manufacturer
Display
Ｔ１０２ＥＮＴ
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１０２ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
y Pressing [ENTER] clears data contained in the RAM and starts system initialization.
App.3-14
3.2.3. T110 (No analytical curve)

Description y EEPROM does not contain analytical curve data.
y Judgment is made at the beginning of measurement.
Possible cause y The analytical curve was initialized in the reverse mode.
y Measurement has started with insufficient analytical curve input.
y EEPROM is electrically faulty.
user
Action taken by y In the reverse mode “100”, → “ENTER” → “1” → “ENTER”, print service
manufacturer information to see if analytical curve is selected.
y If no analytical curve is selected, enter the analytical curve number, in the reverse
mode “120”.
Display
Ｔ１１０ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１１０［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１１０ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Pressing [1] starts system initialization.
App.3-15
3.2.4. T120 (Inlet error)

Description y DC motor operated for a while but no change found in positioning PI.
y Check is made while introduction lever is operating.
Possible cause y Introduction lever bumped against something, causing time delay.
y Introduction motor won’t run.
y Setting of delay time from PI detection to stop, stored in EEPROM, is wrong.
y PI is broken.
Action taken by y Check inlet for object that will interfere with the introduction lever.
user
Action taken by y Check inlet for object that will interfere with the introduction lever.
manufacturer y Check introduction motor wiring for disconnection.
y In the reverse mode “400”, check status of PI (waiting position, surplus urine suction
position) at inlet.
y Print out parameters and verify settings of inlet waiting position (IntroWaitPos) and
inlet surplus urine suction position (IntroSuckPos).
Process y Aborts the measurement and displays message.
y Performs system initialization.
Display
Ｔ１２０ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１２０［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１２０ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Type of trouble detected
1. Travel time of the introduction lever from waiting position PI to surplus urine
suction position PI becomes longer, 1 sec minimum.
2. Introduction lever has moved from surplus urine suction position to transport
waiting position, but the surplus urine suction position PI still “detects” the
introduction lever.
3. Travel time of the introduction lever from transport waiting position to surplus
urine suction position PI becomes longer, 360 ms minimum.
4. Travel time of the introduction lever from surplus urine suction position PI to
waiting position PI becomes longer, 1 sec minimum.
y Trouble message will be displayed. Pressing [ENTER] will clear the problem.
App.3-16
3.2.5. T121 (Transport section error)

Description y DC motor operated for a while but no change found in positioning PI.
y Condition is checked while the transport lever is operating.
y At the beginning of photometry, transport lever was not at waiting position PI.
Possible cause y Transport lever bumped against something, causing time-out.
y Transport motor will not run.
y Time lag setting from PI detection to stop, stored in EEPROM, is wrong.
y PI is broken.
Action taken by y Check transport section for object that will interfere with the transport lever.
user
manufacturer y Check transport motor wiring for disconnection.
y In the reverse mode “400”, check status of PI (waiting position) at transport section.
y Print parameters and check settings of transport section waiting position
(SendWaitPos).
Display
Ｔ１２１ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１２１［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１２１ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Trouble detection
Time lag from start of transport operation to PI detection becomes longer: 2 sec or more.
Transport lever was not at waiting position at the beginning of photometry.
App.3-17
3.2.6. T123 (Incoming test strip detection error)

Description y Incoming test strip detection PI is still “detecting” test strip although transport of test
strip for 1 port has finished.
y Condition is checked while the transport lever is operating.
Possible cause y Incoming strip detection window is dirty.
y Test strip is placed on the incoming strip detection window.
y PI is broken.
Action taken by y Check incoming strip detection window for dust or test strip. If the window is dirty,
user perform cleaning.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “500”, check the detection level of incoming strip detection PI.
Display
Ｔ１２３ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１２３［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１２３ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
y PI detection level: 100±5 counts without test strip
App.3-18
3.2.7. T130 (Photometric section initialization error)

Description y System of photometric section was not correctly initialized.
y Judgment is made during initialization.
Possible cause y Optical system stepped out.
y Number of driving pulses for rightward movement of optical system was different for
leftward movement.
y Optical system waiting position PI is broken.
Action taken by y Remove any scattering test strips from transport section.
user y Remove test strips from overflowing waste box.
Action taken by y Check photometric section for object that will be hit.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “400”, check status of PI (waiting position) at transport section.
Display
Ｔ１３０ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３０［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３０ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Difference in the number of driving pulses for rightward movement and leftward
movement was 33 (approx. 1 mm) or more.
Movement toward the left waiting position by 144.8 mm did not cause PI detection.
App.3-19
3.2.8. T131 (Photometric section operation error)

Description y Photometric section failed to complete successful measurement.
y Judgment is made at the end of photometry of every sample.
Possible cause y Optical system stepped out.
y Number of driving pulses for rightward movement of optical system was different for
leftward movement.
y Optical system waiting position PI is broken.
Action taken by y Remove any scattering test strips from transport section.
user y Remove test strips from overflowing waste box.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “400”, check status of PI (waiting position) at transport section.
Display
Ｔ１３１ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３１［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３１ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Difference in the number of driving pulses for rightward movement and leftward
movement was 33 (approx. 1 mm) or more.
Movement toward the left waiting position by 144.8 mm did not cause PI detection.
Optical system was not at waiting position at the beginning of transporting sequence.
App.3-20
3.2.9. T132 (A/D overflow)

Description y High intensity stray light was detected during photometry, causing sampled
wavelength data to exceed specified value.
Possible cause y Disturbing light entered through front slit of the maintenance cover.
y Faulty electronic circuitry (sensor).
y Incorrect light intensity control.
Action taken by y Remove any scattering test strips from transporting section.
user y Verify that the waste box is installed in place as specified. Remove test strips from
overflowing waste box.
y Change orientation of the device.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “420”, check A/Ded waveform length of white board.
Display
Ｔ１３２ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３２［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３２ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Standard A/Ded value is 4,000 counts.
y White board A/D correction is 2,500 2,700±50 counts.
App.3-21
3.2.10. T133 (A/D overrange)

Description y High intensity stray light was detected while sampling white board data, causing
sampled wavelength data to exceed specified value.
y Judgment is made at the end of photometry of every sample during initialization of
system.
Possible cause y Disturbing light entered through front slit of the maintenance cover.
Action taken by y Clean white board.
user y Remove any scattering test strips from transporting section.
y Verify that the waste box is installed in place as specified. Remove test strips from
Display
Ｔ１３３ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３３［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３３ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Standard A/Ded value is 4,000 counts.
App.3-22
3.2.11. T134 (Low A/Ded value)

Description y Sampled white board wavelength data was below the specified value.
system.
Possible cause y Faulty electronic circuitry (sensor).
y White board is dirty.
Display
Ｔ１３４ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３４［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３４ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Standard A/Ded value is 1,500 1,650 counts.
App.3-23
3.2.12. T135 (Excessive A/Ded dark)

Description y Sampled white board dark data was above the specified value.
system.
Possible cause y Faulty electronic circuitry (sensor) (excessive electrical offset).
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “420”, check A/Ded dark.
Display
Ｔ１３５ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３５［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３５ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y Standard A/Ded value is 500 700 counts.
App.3-24
3.2.13. T137 (Undetected black mark)

Description y White base was detected but no sampled black mark data was detected. (i.e. Test strip
was turned over.)
Possible cause y Test strip transport error
y Waste box overflows with test strips, disturbing photometry.
y Wrong test strip placement orientation
y In the normal mode “001”, proceed → “ENTER” → “1” to print parameters and
verify No. 004 Direction (test strip placement orientation) setting.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “420”, check white board A/Ded value at different waveform
lengths.
y Proceed “100” → “ENTER” → “6” → “ENTER” to print setting information and
compare it with the value adjusted upon shipping.
y In the normal mode or the reverse mode “001”, proceed → “ENTER” → “1” → to
print parameters and verify No. 004 Direction (test strip placement orientation)
setting.
Display
Ｔ１３７ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３７［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３７ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y White board A/D correction is 2,500 2,700±50 counts.
App.3-25
3.2.14. T138 (Test strip feed error)

Description y The test strip detected by incoming strip sensor was not sent to photometry section.
(White base was not detected.)
Possible cause y Test strip transport error
y Waste box overflows with test strips, disturbing photometry.
y Clean incoming strip sensor.
y In the reverse mode “500”, check incoming strip detection level.
Display
Ｔ１３８ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１３８［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１３８ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks y White board A/D correction is 2,500 2,700±50 counts.
y Incoming strip detection level:

100±5 counts without test strip
App.3-26
3.2.15. T160 (Initialization failure)

Description y Stop position of optical system or transport lever is not at the PI detection position.
y Judgment is made during initialization of system.
Possible cause y If stop position of both optical system and transport lever are not at the PI detection
position, operation will cause contact.
y Defective electrical circuit (PI).
y Optical pulse motor or transport motor is faulty.
Action taken by y Move the optical system to waiting position.
user
Action taken by y Check photometric section and transport section for object that will be hit.
manufacturer y In the reverse mode “400”, check status of PI.
Display
Ｔ１６０ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１６０［１］
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１６０ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
App.3-27
3.2.16. T170 (External output initialization failure)

Description y Selected communication settings cannot be completed.
y Judgment is made at the upon power-up or modification of communication settings.
Possible cause y Electrical malfunctioning of board.
y Faulty Ethernet board, wrong connection (Output is set to Ethernet but Ethernet board
is not connected.)
user
Action taken by y Check communication setting.
manufacturer y Replace board.
Display
Ｔ１７０ＥＮＴ
ＯＦＦ
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１７０ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
Remarks
HOST connection has no relation to this problem.
y Trouble message is displayed. Press [ENTER]. Turn off power when “OFF” is
displayed.
App.3-28
3.2.17. T171 (Two-way communication error)

Description y Error occurred during communication with HOST.
y Judgment is made during external output.
Possible cause y Cable is disconnected.
y Invalid communication settings.
user
Action taken by y Print parameters and check communication settings.
manufacturer y Replace board.
Display
Ｔ１７１ＥＮＴ
Ｔ１７１［１］ (Only during measurement.)
Printing ¦ ¦
¦ 2005-01-20 16:17 ¦
¦ Ｔ１７１ ¦
¦ ------------------------------- ¦
App.3-29
App 4
Program initialization
App.4-1
App.4 Program initialization procedure
4-1. Operation flow chart
Verifying program version
Initializing EEPROM
Selecting analytical curve information
END
App.4-2
4-2. Verifying program version

• Upon power-up, verify that the program version displayed on the LCD is the latest one.
[LCD display]
AE-4020 01.00
Version No.
• If not the latest version, write the newest program by using the program writing software (from PC).
5-3. Initializing EEPROM

• [0] → ENTER
1: System setting (service setting)

2: User setting
0: Combination of 1 to 5 above.
• [1] → [2] → start EEPROM initialization.
* For further information on operating method, refer to reverse mode operation manual.
5-4. Selecting analytical curve information

• Input the number of desired analytical curve information. → ENTER
For type and number of analytical curve information, refer to reverse mode operation manual.
• [1] → Set analytical curve information.
* For further information on operating method, refer to reverse mode operation manual.
App.4-3
App 6
Ethernet setup
App.6-1
App.6 The setting procedure of Ethernet
Equipment is turned off.
A RS232C terminal is removed.

Two screws are taken.
A connector is
Extracted.
An Ethernet board is attached.

A connector is connected.
It attaches so that it may insert in back metal.
It fixes with two screws.
A seal is stuck.
Wiring is connected and a power supply is switched on.
Ethernet is set up in the reverse mode.The following setup is performed for a "reverse mode operation
procedure document" to reference.
① Communication port setup
② Equipment ID setup.
③ IP address setup
④ Subnet mask setup.
⑤ Default gateway setup.
⑥ DHCP setup
Completion
App.6-2
App 7
Packing
App.7-1
App.7 Packing
Checking and cleaning of parts
Clearing data
Fastening components
END
App.7-2
7-2. Checking and cleaning of parts

[1] Cleaning and checking of parts
Clean and dry the transport lever, feed table, introduction table, suction plate and waste box.
Verify that they are free from dirt and flaw. Replace them.
[2] Internal cleaning
Eliminate dirt and flaw from the ribs of photometric table and transport table R and L.
Wipe off dirt from 2 test strip detection windows.
7-3. Clearing data

[1] Clear setting data and measurement data:
In reverse mode ([-0204-]) or [-4020-]) with 990 ⇒ 6, clear all
parameters and data except for pulse settings, color tone,
DIP and serial numbers.
[2] Print reverse mode parameters:
In reverse mode ([-0204-]) or [-4020-]) with 100 ⇒ 6, print
reverse mode parameters. Duplicate 2 copies of the printout
shown in the figure right (pulse adjust value) by using cut
and paste feature.
Save one copy as production record and attach the other
copy to rear panel of the board cover. (Fig. lower right)
[3] Remove the recording chart from the paper holder.
7-4. Fastening components

[1] Suction plate
Secure the plate with filament tape.
[2] Introduction lever
Secure the lever with filament tape.
(Do not disturb the aperture plate.)
[3] Head cover
Secure the head cover with filament tape (at 2 positions).
[4] Paper cover
Secure the cover with filament tape.
[5] Waste box
Secure the box with filament tape (at 2 positions).
[2] [4]
[5]
[1] [3]
App.7-3
Product name Model name Product Date Creation

AUTION ELEVEN AE-4020 144 2005/09/27 Design team
Part table Item name Item code Rev. T.outsuki
Maintenance parts SB-144-007

Item No. Quantity Unit Item code Rev. Item name Model name Maker Bar code S-code Note
201 1 PC 24-03224 Packing of Main print circuit board 96451 S144-207
202 1 PC 24-03225 A Packing of Driver print circuit board 96452 S144-208
203 1 PC 24-02916 PI-Assembly of drive part for introduction 96453 S144-209
204 1 PC 24-02917 PI-Assembly of drive part for conveyance 96454 S144-210
205 1 PC 24-02918 PI-Assembly of optical unit 96455 S144-211
206 1 PC 24-02919 Assembly of photo-sensor 96456 S144-212
207 1 PC 24-02920 Assembly of micro-switch 96457 S144-213
208 1 PC 24-02921 Assembly of DC-motor(For conveyance) 96458 S144-214
209 1 PC 24-02988 Assembly of DC-motor(For introduction) 96459 S144-215
210 1 PC 23-02930 Assembly of drive part for introduction 96460 S144-216
211 1 PC 23-02932 A Assembly of table base 96461 S144-217
212 1 PC 24-02933 Assembly(R) of mechanism for alignment 96462 S144-218
213 1 PC 24-02934 Assembly(L) of mechanism for alignment 96463 S144-219
214 1 PC 24-02987 A Assembly of drive part for conveyance 96464 S144-220
215 1 PC 24-03022 Assembly(adhesion) of table(R) for conveyance 96465 S144-221
216 1 PC 24-02940 Assembly of motor (motor only : Code 96471) 96466 S144-222
217 1 PC 23-02941 Assembly of optical unit 96467 S144-223
218 1 PC 24-03013 A Assembly of light measurement 96468 S144-224
219 1 PC 24-03023 Key switch (With a plate) 96469 S144-225
220 1 PC B605-044 Printer LTP8235B SII 96470 X605-044
221 1 PC B615-240 Stepping motor PK233PA-C5 Oriental 96471 X615-240
222 1 PC B680-561 CU-joiner FCUJ(1.0)-10F-650-10S5 Hitachi cable 96472 X680-561
223 1 PC B811-121 Hinge TH-125-5 Tochigiya 96473 X811-121
224 1 PC B820-445 Bush(#80) 80F-0406 Oiless 96474 X820-445
225 1 PC B820-449 Coupling GJ5(4-3) Asa Electron Industry 96475 X820-449
226 1 PC B851-231 Polyurethane circle belt MBN3-180 Misumi 96476 X851-231
227 1 PC B851-232 Belt 174-2GT-3 Unitta 96477 X851-232
228 1 PC 24-03201 Packing of Paper cover 96478 S144-234
229 1 PC 24-03202 Packing of table(Lt) for conveyance 96479 S144-235
230 1 PC 24-03203 Packing of Paper cutter 96480 S144-236
231 1 PC 24-03204 Packing of Nut 96481 S144-237
232 1 PC 24-03205 A Packing of ejector 96482 S144-238
233 1 PC 24-03206 Packing of table for light measurement 96483 S144-239
234 1 PC 24-03207 A Packing of alignment plate 96484 S144-240
List of jig for adjustment.
1 PC 74-11835 A Stick of spot center At the time of light measurement part exchange - - It is used on the spot.
1 PC 74-11794 A Jig for Adjustment of Alignment position (Jig-A) The alignment width of an alignment arm is adjusted. - - It is used on the spot.
1 PC 74-11795 A Jig for Adjustment of Alignment receipt width (Jig-C) The receipt width of an alignment arm is adjusted. - - It is used on the spot.
For paper sending position adjustment of
1 PC 74-12398 Jig(2) for Adjustment of Alignment position (Jig-B) - - It is used on the spot.
an introductory arm
It is used at the time of exchange of
1 PC 74-12399 Jig for Adjustment of table base height - - It is used on the spot.
an auto start detection part.
1 PC 74-12279 MS stopper For interlock release - - It is used on the spot.
- -
App.8-1
WORK STANDARD
(1/2)
Date: 09/09/2004
Product Name Subject Symbol Page Date Prepared
AE-4020 Main unit adjustment procedure
Standard No. Approved Reviewed Prepared
SK-144-001
To: Production plant ( plant 2) Hongo
1. Scope
This standard establishes AE-4020 adjustment procedure.
2. Applicable fixtures and instruments

Para. Designation Drawing No. or specification Qty. Registration No. Remarks
3. Subsidiary material (Qty.: approx. per unit)

Para. Designation Drawing No. or specification Qty. Remarks
4. Applicable lot
P 1 2
Rev.
ARKRAY Factory, Inc. Style: 006-01S

Production Engineering Form No. 502
WORK STANDARD
(2/2)
Subject Standard No.
AE-4020
Main unit adjustment procedure SK-144-001
5. Main unit adjustment procedure
(Adjust mechanism)
Adjusting main unit SK-144-002
Adjusting automatic start sensor SK-144-003
Adjusting incoming strip sensing PI SK-144-004
Checking height of test strip feed table SK-144-005
Color tone and DIP detection adjustment SK-144-006
END

WORK STANDARD
(1/9)
Date: 09/08/2004
AE-4020 Adjusting main unit − All pages 03/18/2005 Hongo
SK-144-002
1. Scope
This standard defines adjustment of AE-4020 pulse.
The adjustment procedure is based on the main unit adjustment procedure SK-144-001.

1 Block gage 2.0 mm 1
2 Slide caliper 150 mm 1
3 Scale 150 mm 1
4 1
5 1

1 Test strip Aution Sticks 10EA 1
4. Applicable lot
P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/9)
AE-4020
5. Adjusting method
(Adjust mechanism)
Adjusting standby position of introduction arm Reverse mode: 430
Adjusting surplus urine suction position

Reverse mode: 440
of introduction arm
Reverse mode: 400-1

Adjusting test strip alignment mechanism
400-2
Adjusting standby position of transport lever Reverse mode: 450
Adjusting left standby position of photometric section Reverse mode: 460
Adjusting light quantity of optical system Reverse mode: 420
Adjusting black mark detecting pulse

Reverse mode: 470
(black mark placed on right side)
Adjusting black mark detecting pulse

Reverse mode: 471
(black mark placed on left side)
END

WORK STANDARD
(3/9)
AE-4020
5-2. Adjusting method
(1) Adjusting standby position of introduction arm

[Standard]
Adjust the time so that the end of auto start detect window and end of the test strip are located at
0 - 0.5 mm with the test strip placed along the introduction arm.
Test strip
Introduction arm
• Key operation
7 key: Change adjusted value 50 ms frontward (standby position)
0 key: Move back to the previous standby position
ENTER key: Accept the currently adjusted value and return back to the item number input screen.
storing the value.

WORK STANDARD
(4/9)
AE-4020
(2) Adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm

Adjusting method is described in the operating instruction "Adjusting surplus urine suction position of
introduction arm: SK-144-018".
(3) Adjusting test strip alignment mechanism

Adjusting method is described in the operating instruction "Adjusting alignment arm test strip
positioning: SK-144-011".

WORK STANDARD
(5/9)
AE-4020
(4) Adjusting standby position of transport lever

• Adjust the standby position to the specified value shown below.
• Verify that the following functional specifications will met after positional adjustment.
[Standard]
• The position equivalent of +7 (ms) from the position where test strip alignment springs (at left
and right) contact the test strip tray.
[Functional requirement]
[1] Test strip alignment springs shall positively contact with the test strip tray.
[2] No test strip shall be caught by the transport lever, bent backward, at test strip waste stage.
Test strip alignment spring
No gap or clearance
Test strip tray
Test strip
Transport lever
• Key operation
storing the value.

WORK STANDARD
(6/9)
AE-4020
(5) Adjusting left standby position of photometric section

• Pulse feed may cause step-out. Be sure to use START key for proper movement to the standby
position. Verify that the standard positioning requirement shown below is met.
[Standard] At all 3 locations in front of the photometric position, 0 - 0.5 mm gap as shown in the
figure below shall be maintained.
Photometric
section
Transport table
0 - 0.5 mm
• Key operation
1 key: Shift adjusted value leftward by 1 pulse
3 key: Shift adjusted value rightward by 1 pulse
START key: Move to left standby position according to the entered value.
storing the value.

WORK STANDARD
(7/9)
AE-4020
(6) Adjusting light quantity of optical system

• Adjust the light volume of optical system at an ambient temperature between 22 and 26°C.
• Change measurement wavelength with "−" key and follow the adjusting procedure shown below.
1. Proceed to the following steps with the top cover closed.
• 430 nm:
• 565 nm:
• 635 nm:
• 760 nm:
• Dark level: (LCD reading: 000)

Verify that the reading is 500 counts or below.
* Reading of 2700 ± 200 counts at a wavelength after adjustment is allowable when taking into account
initial fluctuation and temperature variation. Reading outside this range requires readjustment.
VR05 (760 nm) VR03 (565 nm) VR01 (430 nm)
VR04 (635 nm) VR02 (not used)

WORK STANDARD
(8/9)
AE-4020
(7) Adjusting black mark detecting pulse (black mark placed on right side)
• Prepare a test strip having a black mark at a position within the dimensional tolerance specified below.
• Perform adjustment with upper cover closed.
4 ± 0.3
83.5 ± 0.3
110 ± 0.5

• Place the prepared test strip having the black mark on its right hand, in the photometric measurement
location.
• Longitudinal position of the strip shall be so determined that its end touches the rib of transport table.
• Press START key. The detection pulse that scanned the black mark position is displayed on the LCD.
2.0 mm block gage • Longitudinal position: as far as test strip will go


WORK STANDARD
(9/9)
AE-4020
(8) Adjusting black mark detecting pulse (black mark placed on left side)
• Place the test strip used in paragraph (4) on the photometric measurement position with the black mark
on its left side.
• Start adjustment with the upper cover closed.
4 ± 0.3
83.5 ± 0.3
110 ± 0.5

• Place the prepared test strip having the black mark on its left hand, in the photometric measurement
location.
• Longitudinal position of the strip shall be so determined that its end touches the rib of transport table.
• Press START key. The detection pulse that scanned the black mark position is displayed on the LCD.
• Longitudinal position: as far as test strip will go 2.0 mm block gage


WORK STANDARD
(1/5)
Date: 09/08/2004
AE-4020 Adjusting automatic start sensor − All pages 03/08/2005 Hongo
SK-144-003
1. Scope
This standard defines adjustment of automatic start sensor for AE-4020.

1 Test strip No.8 for adjustment Attach N8 (dull) 1

4. Applicable lot
P 1 2 3 4
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/5)
AE-4020
5. Adjusting method
(Adjusting main unit)
Adjusting automatic start sensor

(N8 adjustment: OFF → ON position)
Check automatic start detection 1

(Check N5: not detected)

(Check N3: not detected)

(Check base film: detected)
END

WORK STANDARD
(3/5)
AE-4020
5.2 Adjustment
[1] [Check before adjustment] Verify that the window plate and automatic start sensor are free from
stain and flaw.
[2] Move the introduction lever to the introduction position (to the depth: Reverse mode 400 →
ENTER → 2).
[3] Position the test strip No.8 for adjustment (N8 dull attached: see figure below) at the midpoint of
automatic start detection window.
(with ND paper facing down (detection window))
[4] Turn VR07 on the driver print circuit board fully CCW.
[5] Slowly turn VR07 CW until D04 (red LED) turns on.
* CAUTION [1]: Stop turning VR07 CW once the LED turns on. Higher sensitivity causes sensor
error: LED is kept lit.
* CAUTION [2]: Do not touch test strips N8, N5 and N3 with bare hand. ND surface must be free from
dust and flaw: if contaminated or degraded, replace with new one. Or replace
periodically, at least every 6 months. Store test strips at room temperature in
lightproof condition.
D04 (red) VR07 Driver print circuit board
z Place test strip N8 for adjustment at the midpoint.
ND paper attached surface

is facing detection surface
Detection window

WORK STANDARD
(4/5)
AE-4020
5-3. Verification 1
[1] Hold the introduction lever at introduction position during the step below.
[2] Wile sliding the test strip N5 for adjustment (with dull N5 attached) from the front of detection
window to the depth of the window, verify that the automatic start sensor displays "0: not detected"
on the screen.
* As noted before, ND paper attached surface is facing detection surface (detection window side).
NO. 400 1. 0. 0. 1. 0. 0
Automatic start sensor status indication

1: Detected 0: Not detected
5-4. Verification 2
[2] Leave the screen display as it is. Position the test strip N3 for adjustment (ND paper: dull N3
attached) 2-3 mm from the front of detection window.
* As noted before, ND paper attached surface is facing detection window.
[3] Put your hand over the detection window until "1: detected" is displayed on the screen.
[4] Put back the hand. Display "1: detected" will change to "0: not detected"
[5] Move the test strip N3 for adjustment (ND paper: dull N3 attached) to a position 2-3 mm from the
rear of detection window; and repeat steps [2] and [3] above. Verify "0: not detected" message.
2 - 3 mm from the front face

of detection window.

WORK STANDARD
(5/5)
AE-4020
5-5. Verification 3
[1] Place a white base film (test strip for adjustment N8, N5 or N3 with ND attached surface facing
upward) at a position approx. 5 mm from the front. Move the white base film slowly backward
while observing the screen for the message generated by automatic start sensor. When the message
changes from "0: not detected" to "1: detected", verify that the distance is within 1.5 mm from the
end of detection window.
[2] In the same condition as for the above step, move the base film from a position 5 mm behind the
rear slowly toward front. When the message changes from "0: not detected" to "1: detected", verify
that distance is within 1.5 mm from the end of detection window.
z Test strip for adjustment (N8, N5, N3) ND8 (dull ND8 attached)
* CAUTION: Excessively increased sensitivity of automatic start detection will keep "ON" state during
measurement, and may generate E008 automatic start sensor error. After increasing the
sensitivity of automatic start sensor, be sure to perform verification 1 (ND5) and
verification 2 (ND3).
[Reference] Reflectance (760 nm) of test strips for adjustment measured on AE-4020
[3] ND3: approx. 7%
[Remarks] Do not touch test strips for adjustment (N8, N5, N3) with bare hand. Keep ND surface free
from dust and flaw. Save strips at room temperature under lightproof condition.
Replace strips as they become dirty or degraded, or periodically replace (approx. every
half a year).

WORK STANDARD
(1/3)
Date: 09/08/2004
AE-4020 Adjusting incoming strip sensing PI
SK-144-004
1. Scope
This standard defines adjusting incoming strip sensing PI of AE-4020.


4. Applicable lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/3)
AE-4020
5. Adjusting method
(Adjusting main unit)
Adjusting incoming strip sensing PI
END

WORK STANDARD
(3/3)
AE-4020
5-2. Preparation
[1] Install the main board cover and close the upper cover.
5-3. Adjustment
[1] Open the incoming strip sensing PI level check screen. (Reverse mode 500 → ENTER)
[2] Without using test strip, perform the following settings.
* Main board cover installed and upper cover closed
• Control: VR06 (driver PCB)
• Detect level: 100 ± 5 counts
• LED: DO3 (driver PCB) unlit
5-4. Checking
[1] Place a test strip on the incoming strip sensing PI section and close the upper cover.
[2] Verify the following:
• Detect level: 900 counts or more
• LED: DO3 (driver PCB) is lighting
z Test strip is not present z Test strip is present
Incoming strip sensing PI

Main board cover Upper cover
Driver print circuit board
VR07 VR06 D03

WORK STANDARD
(1/3)
Date: 09/08/2004
AE-4020 Checking height of test strip feed table − All pages 01/13/2005 Hongo
SK-144-005
1. Scope
This standard defines checking height of test strip feed table of AE-4020.


1 Test strip Base film (white) 1
4. Applicable lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/3)
AE-4020
5. Adjusting method
(Adjust mechanism)
NG
Checking height of test strip feed table

Reverse mode: 421
OK
END

WORK STANDARD
(3/3)
AE-4020
5-2. Checking procedure

(1) Checking height of test strip feed table
• Enter: Check sample measurement detail print mode
(Reverse mode: 136 → ENTER → 1)
• In the check sample measurement mode, place base film (white) with black mark on right side and
perform measurement (n=1).
• In the check sample measurement mode, place base film (white) with black mark on left side and
perform measurement (n=1).
• Check that both films meet the following specification.
[Specification] Reflectance at 565 nm, 635 nm and 760 nm shall be equal to or lower than the %
value shown below at all positions for PAD1 through PAD10.
• 100 ± 2.0 %

CHECK
Serial NO.
2005-01-13 09:27
***************************
• 430 (nm)
PAD 1 100.4%
PAD 2 99.8%
PAD 3 99.4%
PAD 4 99.6%
PAD 5 100.0%
PAD 6 99.7%
PAD 7 100.0%
PAD 8 100.0%
PAD 9 99.9%
PAD 10 99.9%
PAD 11 2293
White 2361
Base 1693
• 760 (nm) 100.4%

PAD 1 99.8%
PAD 2
99.4%
PAD 3 99.6%
PAD 4 100.0%
PAD 5
99.7%
PAD 6 100.0%
PAD 7 100.0%
PAD 8
99.9%
PAD 9 99.9%
PAD 10 2293
PAD 11
2361
White 1699
Base

WORK STANDARD
(1/3)
Date: 09/08/2004
AE-4020 Color tone and DIP detection adjustment
SK-144-006
1. Scope
This standard defines color tone and DIP detection adjustment of AE-4020.


1 Ion exchanged water 250 mL 1
3 Paper cup CH-250 (HOGY) 1
4. Applicable lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/3)
AE-4020
5. Adjusting method
(Checking height of test strip feed table)
Color tone and DIP detection adjustment Reverse mode: 480
END

WORK STANDARD
(3/3)
AE-4020
5-2. Preparation
• Fill paper cup with ion exchanged water.
5-3. Adjustment
• Press START key.
• Start measurement of the ion exchanged water on required items, 5 times in synchronous with buzzer
sound.
• Measured color tone corrections and DIP detection thresholds and adjustments will be printed.
• Press "1" key to save the corrected values.
5-4. Verification
• Measure the ion exchanged water 5 times by repeating procedure described in 5.3.
• Verify that the following specifications are met.
• When OK, press 0 key.
[Specification]
• Averaged (Avr) C/M, Y/M, C/r: 0±5
• Variation (R) in C/M, Y/M, C/r: 20 or less
• Averaged (Avr) DIP: 1000 or less

• Variation (R) in DIP: 20 or less
C/M: -7, -5, 0, -1, -4

Y/M: 0, -3, 7, -2, -4
C/r: -6, -4, 4, -1, -4
DIP: 917, 914, 912, 919, 919
C/M Y/M C/r DIP
Average Avr: -3, 0, -2, 916
Variation R: 7, 11, 10, 7
Opt: 983, 1210, 1084, 962

WORK STANDARD
(1/6)
Date: 02/19/2005
AE-4020 Pulley assembly F and R bonding operation
SK-144-010
To: Production plant ( plant 2)

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This standard specifies bonding operation of pulley assembly F and R.

1 Pulley bonding fixture assembly 24-02960 2 ZA-152
3. Subsidiary material (Qty.: approx. per 1 unit)

1 ALTECO F-30 5g
4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/6)
AE-4020
Pulley assembly F and R bonding operation SK-144-010
5. Operation flow chart
Parts cleaning ········· 6-1
Bonding ········· 6-2
Fixture set ········· 6-3
Wait for curing ········· 6-4
Bonding ········· 6-5
Fixture set ········· 6-6
Wait for curing ········· 6-7

WORK STANDARD
(3/6)
AE-4020
6. Work standard
6-1. Parts cleaning
(1) Pulley (64-06928)
[1] Perform ultrasonic cleaning of pulley in SCAT having dilution ratio 30, for 1 minute
[2] Rinsing it with ion exchanged water
[3] Blow off of water droplets with air compressor
[4] Leave them to air dry
(2) Cam pin (64-07833) × 2, pulley shaft (64-07848), pulley pin (64-07832)
[1] Perform ultrasonic cleaning of these parts in SOLMIX for 5 minutes
[2] Leave them to air dry
6-2. Bonding
(1) Preliminary cleaning
Wipe clean bonding section of the pulley with cotton swab moisten with SOLMIX.
Pulley shaft and pulley pin bonding hole
Countersunk pulley shaft and pulley pin

bonding section
Rib (both sides)
Cam pin bonding hole
(2) Mixing adhesive materials

Squeeze the same quantity of ALTECO F-30 base material and hardener out of the respective tubes.
Thoroughly mix them.
Mixed ALTECO F-30 will start curing 15 minutes later at 30°C.
Therefore, do not use F-30 mixed 15 minutes before. Otherwise, it will offer poor performance and
insufficiency of adhesion strength.
(3) Application of F-30

Coat entire D-cut portion of cam pin with mixed F-30.
D-cut
Cam pin 64-07833

WORK STANDARD
(4/6)
AE-4020
6-3. Fixture set

Set bonded ones to pulley bonding fixture assembly (ZA-152).
[1] [2]
Rib clearance
groove
The rib described on the previous page shall seat

Pulley bonding fixture assembly (ZA-152)
in the groove shown in the figure left.
[3] [4]
Secure set plate (74-11857).

Attach pin setter (74-12098) from the bottom to
prevent the cam pin from coming off.
[5] Pulley clamp
screws
Pulley clamp
screws
Verify the position of the pulley rib noted in [2]
above, and then tighten 4 clamp screws in turn.
6-4. Wait for curing

Leave bonded ones on the fixture for at least 6 hours at 5°C until ALTECO F-30 completely cures.
6-5. Bonding
Mix F-30 by following steps described in 6.2.
(1) Application of F-30
Coat entire D-cut portion of pulley pin and pulley shaft with mixed F-30.
D-cut
D-cut
Pulley shaft (64-07848) Pulley pin (64-07832)

WORK STANDARD
(5/6)
AE-4020
6-6. Fixture set

Repeat the procedure described in 6.3 but as shown below, to set bonded ones to pulley bonding fixture
assembly (ZA-152).
[1] [2]
Pulley shaft (64-07848) Pulley pin (64-07832)

[3] [4]
Orientation of pin setter A is opposite.

Pin setter A (74-12144) Pin setter A (74-12144)
[5] [6]
Location of setscrew is different.

Because the pulley pin is not long enough to be positively secured if
[7] the setscrew is installed in the center hole to attach the set plate, the
pulley pin will be bonded skewed.
To bond the pulley pin straight, secure the set plate by driving the
setscrew into the upper hole.
Position of pulley clamp screw

Do not use the screws used for bonding cam pin.
Use of same screws will cause the pulley to slant and will be bonded
skewed.

WORK STANDARD
(6/6)
AE-4020
6-7. Wait for curing

Set the bonded ones to the fixture and leave them for at least 6 hours at 5℃ until ALTECO F-30
completely cures.
[1] Pulley assembly F [2] Pulley assembly R
Cam pin 64-07833
Pulley pin (64-07832)

Pulley shaft (64-07848)
7. Bonding requirement
7-1. Perpendicularity of pulley and shaft
Shafts and pins shall be at 90 ± 0.3° to pulley surface.
This requirement will be met when the fixture setting and bonding have been done by strictly adhering to
the instructions in section 6.
7-2. Bolding strength

Bonded parts shall be kept integral against rotating torque up to 5 kgf·cm applied to pulley, shaft and pin.
This requirement will be met when the fixture setting and bonding have been done by strictly adhering to
the instructions in section 6.

WORK STANDARD
(1/7)
Date: 02/24/2005
AE-4020 Positioning test strip with alignment arm
SK-144-011

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This standard specifies positioning test strip with alignment arm.

1 Alignment lever adjustment fixture 74-12198 1 ZA-165
2 Alignment lever adjustment fixture 2 74-12295 1 ZA-188

1 Aution Sticks 10EA 1
4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/7)
AE-4020
Positioning test strip with alignment arm SK-144-011
Test strip alignment center position ····· 6-1
Verifying test strip transportation status ····· 6-2
OK NG
Adjusting alignment arm standby position ····· 6-3 Readjusting test strip alignment position ····· 6-4
End of adjustment Rechecking test strip transportation status ····· 6-5
Adjusting standby position of alignment arm ····· 6-6
End of adjustment

WORK STANDARD
(3/7)
AE-4020
6. Work standard
6-1. Test strip alignment center position
Prior to this adjustment, position of the introduction arm for surplus urine suction (Reverse mode 440)
shall be completed.
In the single unit operation mode 400 (Reverse mode), press No.2 to move the introduction arm to the
surplus urine suction position.
Place the alignment lever adjustment fixture (74-12198: ZA-165) on the 1st port, in the direction as
shown below.
Transport member guide width
(2nd and subsequent ports): 114 mm
Alignment lever
adjustment fixture
(74-12198: ZA-165)
1st port alignment arm L to R span: 111 mm Device front
Alignment lever
adjustment fixture
(74-12198: ZA-165)
Clearance between
alignment arm and
fixture
Alignment
mechanism setscrew
Adjust the lateral position of alignment mechanism with setscrew so that the clearance between the tip of
alignment arm rib and the fixture is 0 mm. Tighten the setscrew.
Specification: Space between left and right alignment arm ribs: 111 ± 0.5 mm
6-2. Verifying test strip transportation status Test strip 10EA contacts with arm rib.
With alignment arm positioned as specified
in 6-1, test strip 10EA shall be placed to
touch the rib of right-hand arm.

WORK STANDARD
(4/7)
AE-4020
Press No.1 key. While leaving the installed test strip as it is, return the introduction arm and alignment
arm to the standby position. Make sure that the test strip is undisturbed. If disturbed, use "2" key to move
the alignment arm to alignment position to bring the test strip touch the arm.
Under the condition shown in the figure above, press "5" key to move the test strip to a port under the
photometric section.
(Standby position on the transport member is adjusted (Reverse mode 450) and the alignment spring
under the photometric section touches Ctr of transport table.)
Alignment spring
Transport table
Ctr
Clearance between
test strip and guide
Refer to the figure above. Pass a 0.5 mm block gage through the clearance between test strip and guide.
(If the block gage fails to pass, jump to 6-4.)
Next, reverse the direction of the test strip as shown in the figure below (holding portion of the strip at
left), touching it to left-hand arm.
Test strip 10EA touches the arm.

Press "1" key to return the introduction arm and alignment arm back to the standby position. Press "5"
key to move the test strip under the photometric section.
Clearance between test strip and guide

Refer to the figure above. Pass a 0.5 mm block gage through the clearance between test strip and guide. If
the block gage fails to pass, jump to 6-4. Otherwise, proceed to 6-3.

WORK STANDARD
(5/7)
AE-4020
6-3. Adjusting alignment arm standby position
In reverse mode 400, use "1" key to move the introduction arm and alignment arm to the standby
position.
Arm stopper setscrew

Arm stopper
Clearance between
alignment arm and fixture
Alignment lever adjustment fixture (74-12198: ZA-165)

(2nd and subsequent ports):
114 mm
Alignment arm standby

position
Lateral span: 121 mm
Device front
Set the alignment lever adjusting fixture to the figure above.

Position the arm stopper so that the clearance between the tip of the alignment arm rib and fixture is
0 mm.
Specification: Distance between ribs of left and right alignment arm at standby position is 121 ±
0.5 mm.

WORK STANDARD
(6/7)
AE-4020
6-4. Readjusting test strip alignment position

The clearance between test strip and guide has been verified 0.5 mm or less in 6-2. If this clearance
specification is exceeded afterward, check the deviation of test strip alignment at 1 port through the
photometric section: if deviated rightward, move the test strip leftward, and vice versa.

(2nd and subsequent ports):
114 mm
For shifting test strip
leftward
For shifting test strip

rightward
Clearance between
alignment arm and fixture
Alignment mechanism
setscrew
Position the arm stopper so that the clearance between the tip of the alignment arm rib and fixture is
0 mm.
Specification: Space between left and right alignment arm ribs: 111 ± 0.5 mm
rightward:
Specification: Right side 0.75 ± 0.25 mm
Specification: (Left side 2.25 ± 0.25 mm)
leftward:
Specification: Left side 0.75 ± 0.25 mm
Specification: (Right side 2.25 ± 0.25 mm)

WORK STANDARD
(7/7)
AE-4020
6-5. Rechecking test strip transportation status

The procedure is similar to that described in 6.2 Verifying test strip transportation status.
Specification: The clearance between L/R guide and the end of coming test strip measured under
the photometric member is 0.5 mm or more.
If the clearance is outside this specification, the bonded pulley and associated parts around it may have
play or looseness, or transport motor is not positively installed or secured.
Check and adjust the following components in the order of number:
[1] Orientation of transport motor

[2] Play of parts surrounding bonded pulley
[3] Bonding of pulley
6-6. Adjusting standby position of alignment arm

When the transportation system has been proven OK in 6-5, repeat the procedure described in 6-3.

WORK STANDARD
(1/6)
Date: 02/24/2005
AE-4020 Adjusting height of transport lever
SK-144-012

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This standard specifies adjusting height of transport lever.

Transport member position adjustment
1 fixture 23-02999 1 ZA-160
Transport drive member height
2 adjustment fixture 23-03021 1 ZA-161
3 Gap gage 74-12026 2 ZA-168

4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/6)
AE-4020
Adjusting height of transport lever SK-144-012
Adjusting height of transport lever ···· 6-1

Fine control required?
Not necessary Necessary
End of adjustment Fine adjustment of transport lever height ···· 6-2
End of adjustment

WORK STANDARD
(3/6)
AE-4020
6. Work standard
6-1. Adjusting height of transport lever
Install the transport drive assembly (24-02987) on the chassis assembly where the height of transport
tables Rt and Lt have been adjusted. Adjust relative height of the transport drive assembly and transport
tables and perform positioning.
Temporarily secure with 2 screws

(Do not overtighten but until
spring washers become effective.)
Transport drive member assembly (24-02987)
With the transport drive assembly temporarily secured with 2 screws as described in the figure above,
perform the following:
Slide lock
Temporarily
secured
Temporarily Transport drive
secured member assembly
Transport member position adjustment fixture

(73-02999: ZA-160)
Device front
Install the transport member positioning fixture (73-02999: ZA-160) to transport drive member assembly.
Fully lock the slide lock of transport drive member assembly.

WORK STANDARD
(4/6)
AE-4020
Transport member position

adjustment fixture
(73-02999: ZA-160)
Not-go end dimension (4.5 mm)

By observing the go-end and not-go end on the gap Go-end dimension (4.0 mm)
gage (74-12026: ZA-168), adjust clearance between
left and right rear projections of the transport
member position adjustment fixture and the
transport table to 4.0 - 4.5 mm. Retighten the 2 Gap gage
(74-12026: ZA-168)
screws (at rear) temporarily tightened in 6.1.
Gap gage
(74-12026: ZA-168)
By referring to the figure below, visually check the clearance between the transport member position
adjustment fixture and the transport table Rt and Lt and obtain equal clearance. Retighten the setscrew
shown below.
Clearance between the transport member Setscrew Clearance between the transport member
positioning fixture and the transport table Lt positioning fixture and the transport table Rt
Design value: 1 mm Design value: 1 mm

WORK STANDARD
(5/6)
AE-4020
By observing the go-end and not-go end on the gap gage (74-12026: ZA-168), retighten the setscrew
shown below to make sure that the clearance between left and right front projections of the transport
member positioning fixture and the transport table is 4.0 - 4.5 mm.
Gap gage
(74-12026: ZA-168)
Setscrew
Double check that the gaps between left and right front and rear projections of the transport member
positioning fixture and the transport table are all between 4.0-4.5 mm, when verified by the go-end and
not-go end on the gap gage (74-12026: ZA-168).
6-2. Fine adjustment of transport lever height

If one or more clearances are outside of 4.0-4.5 mm, fine-adjust by using the transport drive member
height adjustment fixture (23-03021: ZA-161).
Clamping screw for fine

adjustment of height:
1 for left, and 1 for right
Chuck
Transport drive member height adjustment fixture (23-03021: ZA-161)

WORK STANDARD
(6/6)
AE-4020
Secure the transport drive member height adjustment fixture with the setscrew of the optical system.
Chuck
Drive base
Fixture securing points

Clamping screw for adjustment, left
Transport drive member assembly chuck
Clamping screw for adjustment, right
When the fixture is secured and transport drive member assembly is chucked, loosen the setscrew on the
rear of transport drive member assembly while still keeping spring washer working.
While checking 4 clearances by observing the go-end and not-go end on the gap gage, fine adjust position
of transport drive member assembly with left and right clamping screws. After adjustment, retighten the
setscrew on the rear of transport drive member assembly.
Release the transport drive member assembly chuck to remove the fixture. Double check gap at 4
locations.
Transport lever
assembly
These height adjustments keep the height relationship between the transport table and transport lever to
the specification. Result: test strip is fed at correct pitch to the photometric section.

WORK STANDARD
(1/4)
Date: 03/03/2005
AE-4020 Adjusting mounting position of optical motor
SK-144-015

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This standard specifies adjusting mounting position of optical motor.

1 Thickness gage t 0.35 1
4 Square 150 mm (t 0.5) 1

4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/4)
AE-4020
Adjusting mounting position of optical motor SK-144-015
Adjusting mounting position of optical motor ····· 6-1
Checking mounting position ····· 6-2
End of adjustment

WORK STANDARD
(3/4)
AE-4020
6. Work standard
6-1. Adjusting mounting position of optical motor
Optical system assembly

(23-02941) Optical motor assembly (24-02940)
[1] Lateral
Lateral
Clearance between optical frame
and formed pulley (60)
Specification: 0.35 - 0.85 mm
When assembling, insert 150 mm

t.05 square in this gap and secure.
Optical frame
(63-06942) Formed pulley (60)
(64-07183)
[2] Longitudinal
Longitudinal
Clearance between optical frame

and motor angle
Motor angle (64-07131)

WORK STANDARD
(4/4)
AE-4020
6-2. Checking mounting position

[1] Lateral
Refer to the figure [1] on the preceding page.
Insert:
Go: 0.35 mm thickness gage
Not go: 0.85 mm thickness gage
into clearance between the optical frame and formed pulley (60).
[2] Longitudinal
Refer to figure [2] on the preceding page.
Verify that,
Not go: 0.5 mm thickness gage
does not enter clearance between the optical frame and motor angle.

WORK STANDARD
(1/4)
Date: 03/07/2005
AE-4020 Adjusting position of optical system
SK-144-016

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This specification covers positioning of optical system unit and photometric section to the test strip.

1 Spot center stick 74-11835 1
2
3
4

4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/4)
AE-4020
Adjusting position of optical system SK-144-016
Positioning optical unit ····· 6-1
Positioning photometric section ····· 6-2
End of adjustment

WORK STANDARD
(3/4)
AE-4020
6. Work standard
6-1. Positioning optical unit
Photometric unit assembly Spot center stick

(24-02942) (74-11835)
Photometric section
moving pulley
Photometric unit assembly

Test strip width center groove: 0.5 mm
Photometric positioning notch:

1.2 mm
Spot center stick
Visually check relative distance between the positioning notch on photometric unit and the center groove
on spot center stick.
Manually rotate the photometric section drive pulley to move the photometric section laterally for proper
parallelism. Use the optical system assembly setscrews shown below.
Optical system
Optical system assembly setscrew
assembly setscrew

WORK STANDARD
(4/4)
AE-4020
6-2. Positioning photometric section

In the same way as in 6-1, move the setscrew section of photometric section longitudinally to engage
groove on the photometric section with the center groove of spot center stick.
Photometric
section setscrew
Photometric
section setscrew
Adjusting
direction
Checking member
Specification: Align the center groove on spot center stick with the photometric unit assembly
within ± 0.2 mm.

WORK STANDARD
(1/3)
Date: 03/11/2005
AE-4020 Adjusting transport motor installation
SK-144-017

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This work standard covers the requirements for positioning adjustment when mounting the transport
motor assembly on the drive base.

1 Block gage 4 mm 1
2 Thickness gage 0.1 mm
3
4

4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/3)
AE-4020
Adjusting transport motor installation SK-144-017
Assembling transport motor ···· 6-1
Positioning and securing of transport motor assembly ···· 6-2
End of adjustment

WORK STANDARD
(3/3)
AE-4020
Adjusting transport motor installation SK-144-017
6. Work standard
6-1. Assembling transport motor
Motor clamping plate
64-07545
DC motor
Flexible coupling
B615-238 HG16-240-AB-00
B820-449 GJ5 (4-3)
NIDEC COPAL CORPORATION
Hexagon socket setscrew for securing coupling
M3 × 4 S (black) WP
[1] Installing claming plate to motor
Nonadjustable mounting: Allowance is screw hole diameter ± 0.2 mm
Rotational direction: optional
[2] Securing the coupling
For the purpose of this assembly, do not use hexagon socket setscrew supplied with the coupling.
Use setscrew described below.
Clearance between plate surface and coupling surface shall be 4 ± 0.5 mm.
Insert 4 mm block gage in the clearance between plate surface and coupling surface, and secure.
Hexagon socket setscrew for coupling shall not touch D-cut section of motor output shaft.
Hexagon socket setscrew shall be retightened with 0.25 Nm (2.5 kgfcm) up to 30 - 45° by using L
wrench.
6-2. Positioning and securing of transport motor assembly

The motor axial gap between bushing and
coupling in the figure left shall be (0 + 0.1,
0) mm per ton.
Clearance between Thickness gage 0.1 mm: not go
bushing and coupling If drive base and motor clamping plate are at a
maximum right angle, total angle is 1° on the
Drive base figure, and nominal tolerance is 2°. This causes
no problem because allowable bending angle of
Short side of motor coupling is 5°.
clamping plate (9 mm) Motor axial When securing the transport motor assembly, be
(long circular
sure that the step at motor side and step at the
hole axial)
Step at Step at top are 1 ± 0.25 mm along the short side of
motor side the top motor clamping plate (figure left).
Place top end of drive base on the surface plate,
place 1 mm thickness gage and screw the motor
clamping plate.
Under this condition, verify positioning by
using:
Thickness gage 1.3 mm: not go
Thickness gage 0.8 mm: go

WORK STANDARD
(1/4)
Date: 03/16/2005
AE-4020 Adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm
SK-144-018

CSG 1 QA 1
RDC 1 AF 1
1. Scope
This standard specifies adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm.

1 Introduction arm positioning fixture 74-12158 1
2
3
4

4. Applicable lot
First lot
P 1 2 3
Rev.

WORK STANDARD
(2/4)
AE-4020
Adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm SK-144-017
Adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm ····· 6-1
End of adjustment

WORK STANDARD
(3/4)
AE-4020
6. Work standard
6-1. Adjusting surplus urine suction position of introduction arm
Test strip is brought to the suction ports by the introduction arm through the test strip inlet. By pressing
the test strip against the suction plate, excessive urine is bled out. Adjust the position of the introduction
arm:
Suction ports
(suction plate)
Introduction arm
Not go checking
section
Introduction arm
positioning fixture Go checking section
(74-12158)
Place the introduction lever alignment fixture on the suction ports as show below.
Enter reverse mode 440.

The introduction arm moves to push the fixture against suction ports. See the figure below.

WORK STANDARD
(4/4)
AE-4020
Introduction arm
and pusher
Adjust the distance from the pusher tip to the depth to 4.5 - 4.85 mm.
A pair of pushers have 0.5 mm max. longitudinal deviation at tip. Correct the deviation at the pusher
having deviation at front.
To meet this adjustment requirement, first enter reverse mode.

While moving items shown in the figure on the preceding page, determine the time (ms) where movement
is to be stopped, after PI before and after introduction drive section changes from bright to dark, to avoid
touching the go check section (4.5 mm) but to touch the not go check section (4.85 mm).


AE-4020-Service Manual Akray 4020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AE-4020-Service Manual Akray 4020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AUTIONＴＭ ELEVEN

Date of issue Jun. 2005

Drawing No. AE-4020-C-09B-015

1. Outline of the Analyzer

4. Electrical Circuit Diagrams

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

1. Outline of the Analyzer

Measurement is done by the Single or Dual Wavelength Reflectance Method.

Measurement of Test Strips

However, the calculation of BLD is made for a single

GLU 635 760

● Combination of Tone and Hue

The tone and hue of urine sample are obtained by YELLOW

The Hue is obtained by the right chart. (NORMAL × RED

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

2) Assembly of cover for maintenance

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

3) Assembly of under cover

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

Item No. Qt Parts Model No. Specification Item Code Cont.

5) Assembly of Optical Unit

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

6）Assembly of table base

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

7) Assembly of drive part for introduction

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

8) Assembly of drive part for conveyance

Previous drawing No. Drawing No. Assembly Standard

Assembly of DC-motor,Coupling, Polyurethane circle belt, PI-Assembly of drive part for

Chapter 3 Service Mode Specifications (Rev. A) From V1.14 and 1.13C

2 Analytical curve ............................................................................................................................................... 5

3 Entering/exiting service mode ...................................................................................................................... 14

5 Operation of function .................................................................................................................................... 21

5-27 Item No. 320: Set device ID (0: fixed) ........................................................................................................ 38

6-3 After entering all the Patient ID Nos................................................................................................................. 77

7 Operation of function (Rev.A)……………………………………………………………………….….... ... 81

Device status initialization

2 Analytical curve (Rev. A)

Calibration curve with Chinese specifications

Indicates a rank to which abnormal mark is applied.

Indicates a rank to which abnormal mark is applied.

Indicates a rank to which abnormal mark is applied.

Indicates a rank to which abnormal mark is applied.

2-5 AE-4020 ( Operation display [C AE4020 SI1] )

2-6 AE-4020 ( Operation display [C AJ4270 SI1] )

2-7 Change in analytical curve

3 Entering/exiting service mode

3-1 Upon power-up

(1) Turn on the power while pressing STOP key.

Enter the password from "-" and "0"

"-" is displayed but password is not.

PASS [------] Press ENTER key.

{ Backup voltage drop

3-2 Entering reverse mode while waiting for measurement

No. 000 10EA

3-3 Exiting service mode

(3) At the end of initialization, measurement standby screen appears.

ROM version Press STOP key -4020- to service mode

AE-4020 01.00 PASS [------]

No. 000 No. 100 1

No. 110 0-1

Select analytical curve Check EEP writing

No. 120 1 No. 120 0-1 EEP 0-1